Conversational Chinese Grammar Text

Page 1 of 265
Chinese OCW Conversational Chinese is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-No

Derivative Works 2.5 China Mainland License. Based on work at Chinese www.chineseocw.com

Chinese OCW Conversational Chinese
Grammar Text

by

Kurt Hamm
and
Rose Xu

(X L)

edited by

Christine Feng
(Fng Xiojn)

Page 2 of 265

Table of Contents
Unit page
Introduction to Studying Chinese 8
Summary of this Book 15
Unit 1 Greetings, Names and Titles 26
Addressing friends, family and coworkers 27
Statements 27
Negative Statements 27
Questions 28
Unit 2 To Be Sentences 29
To Be an noun 30
And / Also / All (Statements) 30
OR (Statements) 30
Questions 31
Unit 3 Showing Possession (de) 34
Questions 35
Unit 4 Numbers and Measure Words 37
The Number one 38
The Number two 38
Measure Words 38
Unit 5 Adjectives 39
To Be an Adjective 40
Questions 42
General Rules for Modifying Nouns 43
(sh)(de) 43
Questions 44
Using (de) with Adjectives 44
Adjectives that are Modified by Degree 45
Measure Words and Adjectives 45
Example Sentences 46
Unit 6 Comparisons 47
Comparing Two Things 50
Questions 50
Comparing Two Things () 51
Questions 51
A is equal to or greater than B () 51
A is less than B () 52
Questions 52
Stating Two Things are the Same ( / ) 53
Stating Two Things are not the Same () 54
Questions 55
Relatively / Comparatively () 56
Page 3 of 265

Progression () 56
Unit 7 To Have () Sentences 57
Questions 58
Unit 8 Days and Dates 60
Months and Days 60
Dates and Years 62
Questions 62
Unit 9 Time 64
Stating the Time 64
Length of Time 66
Questions 66
Unit 10 Action Verb Sentences 67
Habitual / Intentional Actions 67
Time Phrases 68
Questions 69
Unit 11 Action Verb Sentences - Actions in Progress 72
Questions 75
Unit 12 Action Verb Sentences () () 78
Completed Actions () 78
Questions 82
Actions (as part of past experience) () 86
Questions 86
Describing a situation () 88
Unit 13 Using (le) to indicate a change of state 89
Unit 14 To Be at a Place 91
as a Verb 91
Questions 92
Habitual or Intentional Actions 92
Actions in Progress 93
Completed Actions 93
Questions 94
Unit 15 There is (there exists) (, , ) 95
There is (there exists) 96
Beside 97
Opposite () 98
Between 98
There is not 99
Is not beside 100
Is not opposite 100
Page 4 of 265

Is not between 101
Questions 102
Unit 16 Over / On / Under / Below / In / Out 103
Questions 106
Unit 17 Actions in a Continuing State () 108
Questions 111
Unit 18 How Often / How Many Times 114
Often 114
How Often 115
How Many Times 117
Normally / Usually 117
Questions 118
Unit 19 How / Why / Like / Dislike 120
Expressing Purpose (Why) 121
Questions 121
Expressing Means and Method 123
Questions 124
Stating Likes and Dislikes 125
Questions 126
Unit 20 Compliment of Potentiality () 127
Sentences with no Action 127
Questions 128
Sentences with Potential Action 129
Unit 21 Comparisons 130
Two Actions (A is greater than B) () 130
Two Actions (A is not greater than B) () 131
Questions 132
Two Actions (A is equal to or greater than B) ( / ) 132
Questions 133
Stating that two actions are the same () 134
Stating Two Actions are the not Same () 135
Questions 135
Unit 22 Verb Compliment of Results 136
Section 1 Verbs and Adjectives 138
Verbs 138
Adjectives 139
Section 2 Verb Compliment of Results 140
Questions 143
Page 5 of 265

Section 3 Using Compliment of Results 144
and Compliments of Potentiality
Unit 23 Directional Verbs ( and ) 148
Habitual or Intentional Actions 149
Actions in Progress 149
Completed Actions 149
Questions 149
Unit 24 Will / Want / Think / Should / Must (Auxiliary Verbs) 151
Section 1 Verbs 152
Want (verb - ) 152
Questions 152
Think (verb - ) 153
Questions 154
Think / Opinion (verb - / ) 154
Questions 155
Need (verb - ) 156
Need (verb - - di) 156
Questions 157
Section 2 Auxiliary Verbs 157
Want / Will - Auxiliary Verbs ( / ) 157
Questions 158
Should - Auxiliary verbs ( / ) 159
Questions 159
Must - Auxiliary Verb () 160
Questions 161
Unit 25 Can / Able / Possible / Probable / Will (Auxiliary Verbs) 162
Can (ability or knowledge) Verb () 163
Can (Auxiliary Verb) () 163
Questions 164
Possibly / Probably (Auxiliary Verb - ) 164
Questions 165
Can (Auxiliary Verb - ) 165
Questions 166
Possibility (may / can) (Auxiliary Verb - ) 167
Page 6 of 265

Questions 167
Possible / Not Possible - (lio) 168
Unit 26 If / Then / Because / Don't / Other / But / Still 171
Because So () 172
If Then () () () 173
Then () () () 175
Don't () 179
Other () () 179
But () 179
Still / Yet / Also / Emphasis () 180
Unit 27 Before / After / While / When 181
Before () 181
After () 181
While () 182
When / While () 183
Questions 183
Unit 28 Repetition of Actions () () 184
(zi) and (yu) 184
(yu) - two actions happen in succession 185
The difference between and 185
two situations that occur at the same time 186
used to indicate a continuation of actions 186
Unit 29 From / To / With 187
From () 187
From () 188
With () 188
Near / Nearby ( / ) 189
Unit 30 Simple Compliments of Direction ( and ) 190
and Compound Compliments of Direction
Simple Compliments of Direction ( and ) 190
Compound Compliments of Direction 192
Supplemental Words 193
Unit 31 Durations of Actions 199
Unit Summary 199
Unit 32 Modifying Verbs () 218
Single syllable adjectives (de) 220
Reduplicated Single Syllable Adjectives 220
Two Syllable Adjectives with Verbs (de) 220
Reduplicated Two Syllable Adjectives 221
Page 7 of 265

Unit 33 (b) Sentences 223
(b) sentences 226
Rules of (b) sentences 226
Using in (b) sentences 227
Auxiliary Verbs in (b) sentences 229
Time Phrases in (b) sentences 231
Questions 232
Commands and Requests 239
To Give Something to Someone 246
Auxiliary Verbs and the Particle (le) 247
Verb compliments of results 247
Sentences that must use 249
Compound Compliment of Direction 253
Unit 34 (bi) Sentences 259
Comparison of Active and Passive voice 260
Summary of rules for simple (bi) sentences 260
Using (rng) and (jio) 261
Questions 263

Appendices
Appendix A Pinyin
Appendix B Advance Measure Words
Appendix C Shopping and Money
Appendix D Numbers in Use
Appendix E Large and Small Numbers
Pinyin Pronunciation Chart
Glossary

Pinyin is a phonetic representation of Chinese characters, it is not proper Chinese. In
the material in these books, we have only capitalized pinyin spellings that are
normally used as such in English. Those words are limited to the names of cities, such
as Beijing and Shanghai and family names.

In this text, we have used the more common pronunciation (shi) for the character
instead of (shu). In dialogs, the pinyin representations for (y) and (b) have
been changed to reflect the way they are spoken in conversation. (Reference:
Grammar Text Appendix A Tone Change Rules)

Introduction to Studying Chinese
While there are many dialects of Chinese spoken throughout China, Mandarin is the
official language and most universally spoken in the country. As a written language, it
is universal to all the dialects. Chinese writing does not use letters; it uses ideographic
symbols called characters. Each character is one syllable. There is a phonetic system
for the characters that uses letters. This system, called pinyin, allows one to learn
pronunciation without much difficulty. Looking at the example below, it is apparent
that learning to speak Chinese is much easier than learning to read or write the
language.

Chinese Pinyin English
Characters Phonetic Representation Meaning

cn tng cafeteria

Tones
In the example above, notice that each pinyin syllable has a mark over it. In the pinyin
pronunciation system, tones are accounted for by tone marks above each syllable. If
no tone mark is used, the tone is neutral. A neutral tone is spoken lightly. The tone
marks are shown below.

first tone second tone third tone fourth tone
Page 8 of 265

Each tone has both pitch and inflection as the diagram below illustrates: 1st - a high,
flat tone, 2nd - a rising tone, 3rd - a tone that combines a falling and a rising inflection,
4th - a falling tone and a neutral tone that is soft and light.

1
st
tone high 5
y shng
P 4 4
2
nd
tone I I
r shng T 3 3
C C
3
rd
tone H 2 2
sn shng
low 1
1
st

2
nd

4
th

3
rd
4
th
tone T I M E
s shng

Page 9 of 265

The example below shows how different tones distinguish words that are otherwise
pronounced alike.

1
st
tone 2
nd
tone 3
rd
tone 4
th
tone

d d d d
to droop to answer to hit big

In China, you will often see pinyin writing on signs under characters. Pinyin spellings
are included on hotel signs, advertisements, road signs and buildings; however, tone
marks are only used in books, not on signs. People's names as well as city names,
such as Beijing and Shanghai, will appear in English writing as their pinyin
spellings.

The importance of using correct tones when speaking cannot be overemphasized.
Using incorrect tones makes it nearly impossible to understand what is being said.
For example, in the sentence below, notice how changing the tone of han changes
the meaning of the sentence.

Can you speak hny ?
4
th
tone means. Can you speak Chinese?

Can you speak hny ?
2
nd
tone means. Can you speak Korean?

Pronunciation
Most Chinese books for beginners have pinyin charts. All the sounds that are possible
to speak are on the chart. The easiest way to master pronunciation is to learn all the
sounds on the pinyin chart first. Learn to listen for them and learn to speak them. It
helps to review the rules, which are quite simple, at the beginning of your program.
This helps avoid confusion later on. For instance, the "un" in "gun" is not
pronounced the same as the the "un" in "xun". An explanation of this chart is
given in the first appendix of this book.

After that, practice by repeating audio material and reading sentences aloud. First,
listening is improved, particularly in getting used to hearing tones. Additionally,
speaking the texts helps in two ways. First, speaking develops the mouth muscles
needed to say sounds that are unfamiliar. For instance, English has no equivalent
sound for the (u) in (yu) (month). Making this sound requires drawing in the
cheek muscles in a way not familiar to native English speakers. After speaking a
sound several times, the mouth muscles get used to it, and in time, it is gets easier.
Second and most importantly, English speakers aren't used to using tones. Repeating
the texts helps develop the habit of speaking the tones.
Page 10 of 265

After understanding how pinyin works, it is tempting to simply ignore characters in
your Chinese study program. While pinyin is indispensable when studying Mandarin,
Chinese characters are not the same as words. Very few spoken Chinese programs rely
solely on pinyin. This is true because a working knowledge of characters simplifies all
grammar explanations as well as vocabulary acquisition. While it isn't necessary to
learn to read or write proficiently, knowing how characters are manipulated to form
words and grammatical structures makes learning to speak Chinese much easier.

Characters
Each character represents a word or an idea. Many characters, in their monosyllabic
form, have meaning - but are not typically used alone. For instance, (xi) means
"summer". However, "I like summer" is expressed as I like (xi tin). In this
case, their monosyllabic forms are only used when listing them.

Bijng yu sg
jji chn xi qi
dng.
Beijing has four seasons spring, summer, autumn, winter

When listing things, in general, it is common to see or hear monosyllabic word forms.
On buses and subways there is usually a sign that says, please offer your seat to
(lo ru bng cn yn) (old, sick ,weak, disabled, pregnant). Each of these
individual characters has meaning when used alone, but are only used alone when in a
list. If one of these groups of people were mentioned, separately, they would use the
following multi-syllabic phrases:

lo nin rn
senior citizens

shn t x ru de rn
weak people

shng bng de rn
sick people

cn j rn
disabled

hui yn de f n
pregnant women

Consider the following mono-syllabic words:

lo old

zhng middle

nin year

rn person(s)

The following multi-syllabic words seem fairly intuitive

zhng nin rn middle aged person(s)

lo nin rn old aged person(s)

If both groups are referred to at the same time, a multi-syllabic phase is used to
express the combination of the groups as:
Page 11 of 265

zhng lo nin rn both old age and middle aged person(s)

"Tea is enjoyed by many (zhng lo nin rn). "

Another example: the two syllable word for China is (zhng gu), the two
syllable word for France is (f gu). When referring to relations between the two
countries the first syllable of each word is used form the multi-syllabic phrase, "
(zhng f)", as in the sentence, "(zhng f) (Sino-French) relations are very
good" . The word for desk is (zhu z) and the word for chair is (y zi)
but when referring to desks and chairs (zhu y) is used as in the sentence
This room has no (zhu y).

The examples above illustrate the tendency of the language to be brief. Chinese have
a penchant for brevity and often shorten expressions. Similar to when people in the
U.S. are discussing a state university, it isn't uncommon to hear the word "state" being
used in place of a university's name. This is much more common in Chinese than in
English. For example, (Bi jng t sh gun) [Beijing library] becomes
(bi t) or when referring to the bus stop for students going to the national
college entrance exams, (go ko de xu shng ch zhn) [college
entrance exam student bus stop] you will hear, (ko shng zhn). This way of
making phrases, by dropping characters and combining them, is also how words are
formed.

To create a single multi-syllabic word, single characters are taken from other multi-
syllabic words and combined in the same way as the phrases discussed above. For
instance, (x y din), is a multi-syllabic word that means "laundry shop". The
words for "shop" and "clothes" are have two characters each; however, only one
character from each word is used to form the words "laundry shop".

wash clothes shop laundry shop
(x) (y fu) (shng din)

(x) (y) (din) (x y din)

The list below further illustrates how this works. Knowing these associations helps
simplify learning new words. Notice that in the word (y fu), (f) is spoken in
the neutral tone and in the word (f w), (f) is spoken in the 2
nd
tone.

y rain

xi y to rain

y y raincoat

y clothes

d big
Page 12 of 265

d y coat

y fu clothes

f serve, serve as

w to be engage in

f w service

f w yun service person

y w medical matters

y medicine, doctor

y w sh clinic

sh room

In the word list above, knowing that the character (yun) in the word (f w
yun) indicates a kind of job title, makes learning new words such as the ones below
easier.

d z to type

d z yun typist

fi xng to fly

fi xng yun pilot
shng din store, shop

din yun sales clerk

hi sea

hi yun sailor

However, ignoring the characters altogether, simply studying the language using
pinyin, increases the chances of making wrong associations when learning new words.
For instance, the character (yun) (service person) has the same pronunciation as
the character that means "an area of land for growing plants" or "a place for public
recreation", (yun). Limited to only using pinyin, a beginner might mistakenly
assume the word for "garden", (hu yun), to mean "gardener".

hu yun garden

dng w yun zoo

gng yun public park

xio yun campus

The examples above illustrate that including characters in Chinese study programs
simplifies vocabulary acquisition, by showing associations that make learning new
Page 13 of 265

words easier, as well as avoiding confusion through wrong associations.

While it isn't necessary to learn to read or write proficently, when learning to speak
Chinese, a familiarity with characters helps immensely in understanding the language
and avoiding confusion. Deciding to include characters in a course of study brings up
the question "how can a beginner remember new characters?"

Radicals
When people try to remember unfamiliar things, such as Chinese characters, it is
necessary to associate this new information with something familiar, to develop
memory hooks. Native English speakers have little experience in remembering, what
appear to be, pictures. In an effort to remember characters, a common mistake many
beginners make is to create their own "personal" memory associations or memory
hooks. They construct mental images that help them remember the complexities of
each character. For instance, "This looks like a house and that looks like a pillow, so
this character looks like a pillow on a house." Do not do this! This leads to
remembering a very complicated set of pictures that becomes very difficult to manage.
There is an easier way deal with remembering characters. To simplify reading
characters, it is important to understand that each character is composed of common
elements that are called radicals. There are around 241 radicals. Using radicals makes
recognizing and remembering characters much easier. In the example below, notice
how each radical on the left is used in the characters on the right. Also notice that the
radicals may not always appear exactly the same in different characters.

Radical Characters

Sometimes, knowing the meaning of a radical makes understanding the meaning of a
character it is used in easier to remember. For instance, is the radical for water. It
is called "three dot water". In the example below, knowing the meaning of this radical
makes it easier to remember the meaning of the characters that it is in.

(x) wash (hi) sea (h) lake (jing) river

In the following example, is the radical for wood, which is in the characters that
mean "tree" and "forest".

(m) wood (sh) tree (ln) forest

Understanding radicals makes recognizing characters much easier and systematic. As
in the examples above, there are some radicals that help reveal a characters meaning.

In the example below, the meaning of the radicals do not reveal the meaning of the
character; however, remembering the character for the word "building" isn't so hard if
you know the radicals.

m (rice)

m (wood)
lu (building) n (woman)

Understanding radicals makes it possible to become familiar with characters in a
systematic way. As in the example above, the character for "building" breaks down
into its component parts, radicals. Using these radicals allows learners to have a
consistent set of memory hooks when dealing with characters.

As we have seen, while characters seem difficult, learning to recognize them is
manageable. Know how characters are used to form words as well as how radicals
form characters makes remembering this new kind of information much easier.
Relying solely on pinyin when learning to speak, can make it more difficult than it
needs to be, having a familiarity with Chinese characters makes learning new words
easier.

Grammar is also simplified by understanding characters. While Chinese grammar is
not difficult, the sentence structures are much easier to understand if characters are
not ignored. This is evident from the beginning. The following unit is a summary of
the contents of this book. These examples make it clear how understanding characters
helps in understanding basic grammar.

Page 14 of 265

Page 15 of 265

Summary of this Book
For English speakers, the Chinese language appears quite difficult. Since it is
character based and uses tones, it seems that nothing is familiar. However, there are
some similarities between the languages. Both Chinese and English have a subject-
verb-object (SVO) sentence structure within their grammar rules. Furthermore,
Chinese basic sentence structures, such as those that express numbers, places,
directions, measure words, prepositions, comparisons, time durations and conditional
statements are very dependent on word order. This makes it fairly easy to understand
and learn Chinese grammar. The units at the end of the book explain directional
compliments, (b) sentences, which are OSV (object-subject-verb), and (bi)
sentences, which are passive voice sentences.

Summary of Verbs
One of the main differences between Chinese and English is that Chinese is a verb-
centered language and English is noun-centered. In Chinese, there are more kinds of
verbs and prepositions are used much less. The examples below will help new
learners understand how characters work and how Chinese verbs are used.

Basic SVO sentence:
Subject Verb Object

w ch koy
I eat roast duck.

(Unit 1) To make a sentence negative, add no/not, (b) in front of the verb:

Subject Verb Object

w bch koy
I don't eat roast duck.

To make the statement into a question, add 'ma ' at the end.

This sentence means Do you eat roast duck?

n ch koy ma?
You eat roast duck (question)

(Unit 2) 'To Be' Verb Sentences
The 'to be' verb, (sh), is used the same way in both Chinese and English.
Notice that common nouns do not have plural forms, only a few pronouns have
plural forms.

w sh
losh
w men sh
losh
I am teacher We are teachers.
Page 16 of 265

w b sh
losh
w men b sh
losh
I am not teacher. We are not teacher(s).

(Unit 5) No Verb - 'to be' Verb Sentences
If the entire predicate is an adjective, then no verb is needed.

w mng. w b mng.
I busy I not busy.

In these kinds of sentences, an adverb of degree is usually used to modify the
adjective. If (hn) is used it does not carry any meaning, it simply makes the
sentence grammatically correct. In the sentences below, (fi chng) does carry
the meaning very.

w hn mng. w fi chng mng.
I busy. I very busy.

(Unit 14) No Verb - 'to be' Verb Sentences
If a place name follows (zi) then it carries the 'to be' meaning, which
means to be at a [place name]

Subject Verb Object Other verbs that carry the meaning to be

are covered in Unit 1:
t zi tshgun.
xng to be named
He is at library.
jio to be called

t b zi tshgun.
He is not at library

(Unit 14) Prepositions
(zi) may function as a preposition in sentences with other verbs.

Subject (at place) Verb Object

t zi tshgun kn bozh.
He at library read newspaper

(Unit 7) to have verbs
In sentences below, (yu) is used to express 'to have'.

Page 17 of 265

w yu yxi yngwn sh.
I have some English book(s).

(Unit 4) Measure Words
There are no articles (a, an, the) in Chinese. When specifying a number of nouns,
measure words (MW) (, ling c), sometimes called 'classifiers', are used. In
English, this is comparable to "piece" in a "piece of cake" or "sheet" in a "sheet of
paper". There are over 140 measure words and they are required for almost all nouns
in Mandarin. The measure word (ge) can be used to refer to almost anything. It
isn't considered fluent Chinese but it will get your meaning across. Therefore, one (of
something) is (y g), two is (ling ge) and three is (sn ge). In the
example below, (bn) is the measure word for books.

w yu sn bn yng wn sh.
I have three MW English book(s).

In action verb sentences, measure words are used between the verb and the object:

Subject Verb number MW Object

w mitin ch sn dn
fn
I everyday eat three meals.

(Unit 18) How Often / How Many Times
The words that express the number of occurrences are also placed between the verb
and the object.

Subject Verb number MW Object

w mitin kn ling c
xnwn
I everyday watch two times news.

(Unit 15) There is / are
English sentences beginning with 'there is', meaning 'there exists', are expressed
using (yu)(zi), and (sh).

(zi)
There is a chair on the left side of the desk.

y zi zi zhu zi de zu bin.
Chair is at desks right side
Page 18 of 265

(yu) There is a dormitory beside the library.

t sh gun de png bin yu y g s sh.
Librarys side has one (MW) dormitory

(sh) There is a chair behind the desk.

zhu zi de hu bin sh y b y zi.
Desk's backside is one (MW) chair.

(Unit 10 - 12) Action Verbs
The examples below illustrate how word order is fixed concerning time. The time an
action occurs must go at the beginning of the sentence or directly after the subject.

Subject Time Verb Object

w mngtin ch koy
I tomorrow eat roast duck

Time Subject Verb Object

mngtin w ch koy
tomorrow I eat roast duck

Action verbs can be used alone, but they usually have an object. For example,
(kn) can mean to look, see, watch or read, depending on the object that follows it.
The examples below illustrate how (kn) is used in several different verb-object
phrases. The first example, (kn sh) usually refers to the general idea of
reading, as in I like to read. Action verbs may also be used alone as one word
answers.

Verb-Object Phrase g English Meanin

kn sh read books, reading (in general)

kn din yng watch movies

kn png you see friends

kn bo zh read newspapers

kn z zh read magazines

Subject Time Verb Object

w mi tin kn ling bn
zzh
I everyday read two MW magazine(s).

Page 19 of 265

(Unit 10) Habitual or Intentional Actions (Action Verbs)
Units 10 12 explain that, in Chinese, there are no verb tenses. Verbs are habitual /
intentional, in progress or completed. Context determines if the verb indicates a
habitual or intentional action.

What do you do on weekends?

I read. (habitual)
What will you do tonight?

I will read. (intentional)
w kn sh.

(Unit 11) Actions in Progress (Action Verbs)
Using (zhng zi) or (zi) before an action verb are two ways, of several,
that may used to express an actions in progress.

I am reading.
w zhng zi kn sh. (action is in progress)
I (in progress) read.

This is not the same as English present tense, an action in progress may occur in a
future or past time frame. In the sentences below, example sentence 1 shows a
continuing action in the past, and example sentence 2 shows a continuing action in the
future.

Example 1: At 9 pm last night, he was doing homework.

zu tin wn shng ji din t zhng zi zu zu y
Yesterday evening 9 oclock he (in progress) do homework.

Example 2: When you come to the school tomorrow,

we could be having class.

mng tin n li xu xio deshhou,
Tomorrow you come school (when)

w men k nng zhng zi
shng k

we possible (action in
progress)
have class

Page 20 of 265

(Unit 12) Completed Actions (Action Verbs)
The particle (le) is used to express that actions have been completed.

w kn le sn bn sh. I have read 3 books.
I read (completed
action)
3 MW books.
Using the particle (le) is not the same as using past tense in English, it indicates an
actions completion, which may occur in a future time frame.

Example: After we eat breakfast we will go.

mng tin ch le zo fn y hu w men ji
zu
Tomorrow eat breakfast after we then go.
(completed
action)

When indicating a completed action, (le) means different things depending on
where it is in the sentence. Placing (le) after the verb, places more emphasis on the
specific action. For example, after noticing someone has walked away, the speaker
would say (t q le nr ?) Where did he GO?. Placing (le) at the
end of the sentence places more emphasis on the overall situation. For example, after
a prolonged search for someone, the speaker would say (t q nr le?)
Where has he gone? .

(Unit 13) When (le) is used to indicate a Change of State
When using (le) to indicate a change of state, it indicates that (1) the state has
actually changed, (2) it has changed relative to what a person (speaker or listener)
thought it was or (3) that someone has made a new discovery.

(1) (xi y) means rain. In this sentence, (xi y le) (It is raining), (le)
is used to express a change of state. It wasnt raining before and the speaker saying
that it is raining now.

(2) In the sentence below, the listener did not realize that the speaker was going out
out of town on Monday. (le) is placed at the end of the sentence because this is a
change of state that the listener was not aware of. The speaker realizes that the listener
didnt realize this new information, so the speaker adds (le).

xi g xngqy w ji chchi le
next Monday I (emphasis) travel on business change of state

(3) (t hn go) means he is tall. However, if a relative had not seen a child
Page 21 of 265

for a long time, the speaker could say (t go le). In this case, (le)
indicates a discovery has been made.

(Unit 17) (zhe) is used to indicate a state or action is continuing.

The door is open. The teacher is standing.

subject predicate
verb
subject predicate
verb

mn ki zhe

lo sh zhn zhe

the door open continuing
state

teacher stand continuing
action

Mother is carrying a child.

subject predicate verb object

mm bo zhe hi zi

Mother carry continuing action child

(Units 24 and 25) Auxiliary Verbs
Auxiliary verbs are used before verb-object phrases to show intention, desire or
ability. In this case the verb-object phrase becomes the object.

Subject Verb Object
Subject Auxiliary Verb Verb - Object

w xing
ch fn
I would like to eat a meal

(Unit 22) Verb Compliments of Results
Verb compliments are adjectives and verbs that are attached to verbs to complete
their meanings. There are many kinds of compliments including those that express
duration, quantity, degree, direction, possibility or result. A compliment of result
completes the meaning of a verb by indicating what results the action produced. For
instance, adding (wn) (to finish) after the verb (ch) (to eat) becomes
(ch wn) (finish eating).

w mitin qdin ch wn
fn
I everyday 7 o'clock eat (finish) meal.

Page 22 of 265

Unit 22 covers 7 verbs that are commonly are used as compliments of results,

understand see finish arrive to be at give start

For example: If someone can read Chinese (kn dng) would be used. means to
understand through reading. (kn) means to read and (dng) means to
understand.

Unit 22 also covers 5 adjectives are also used as compliments of results.

du cu qngchu gnjng ho

For example, if someone made a mistake when speaking, (shu cu) would be
used. (shu) means to speak and (cu) means incorrect.

(Unit 23) Directional Verbs
(shng) and (xi) are used as the first character of verb-object phrases that
indicate direction. (shng) is used for actions that involve: going up, going in,
or getting started; (xi) is used for actions: going down, going out, or
finishing. For instance, (lu) means floor (of a building), (shng lu)
refers to the action of going upstairs and (xi lu) means the action of going
downstairs.

shng ch get in a vehicle

xi ch get out of a vehicle

shng q ch get in a car

shng gng gong q ch get on a bus

shng bn start work

xi bn get off work

shng k start class

xi k end class

w mitin qdin shng
gng gng q ch
I everyday 7 o'clock get on public bus

Note: In Unit 16, (shng) and (xi) are the second character used in location
words, for instance, (lu shng) (upstairs) and (lu xi) (downstairs).
Page 23 of 265

(Unit 30) (q) and (li) - USED AS - Simple Compliments of Direction
A directional compliment indicates the direction of the action in a sentence (relative to
the speaker). In sentences 1, 2 and 3 the verbs (q) (go), (li) (come) and (do)
(arrive) are used as verbs. There is no compliment of direction in these sentences.

Subject Time Verb-Object English
1.

He will go to Beijing tomorrow.
t mng tin
q Bijng

2.

He will come to Beijing tomorrow.
t mng tin
li Bijng

3.

He will arrive in Beijing tomorrow.
t mng tin
do Bijng

In sentences 4 and 5, (q) (go) and (li) (come) are used as simple compliments
of direction and are not the main verbs of the sentences.

Subject Time Verb-Object Compliment of Direction
4.

t mng tin do Bijng
q
5.

t mng tin do Bijng
li

4. He will arrive in Beijing tomorrow. (Speaker is not in Beijing)
5. He will arrive in Beijing tomorrow. (Speaker is in Beijing)

(Unit 30) (q) and (li)- USED IN - Compound Compliments of Direction
(q) (go) and (li) (come) are used with other verbs, that indicate direction, to
form compound compliments of direction which are used to compliment other verbs.

Verbs that express direction:

shng xi jn ch hu gu q
go up/on go out/down enter exit return pass rise

When (q) and (li) are combined with the above verbs, they form the following
compound compliments of directions.
Page 24 of 265

Compound Compliments of Direction

shng li come up

jn li come in

shng q go up

jn q go in

xi li come down

ch li come out

xi q go down

ch q go out

hu li come back

q li start and continue

hu q go back

gu li come across

gu q go across

They may stand alone as verbs. In the sentence below, (ch li) is used alone as
a verb with no object.

tiyng cng dng bin ch li
Sun from east comes up.

However, they are most commonly used to compliment other verbs. In the sentence
below, (ch li) is used to compliment the verb (zu) to indicate "come out".

t cng l bin zu ch li le
He from inside walking come out (completed action)

(Unit 31) Duration of Actions
This unit covers 10 sentence patterns used to express how long actions take,
depending on a variety of circumstances. For instance, if the verb can or cannnot
indicate a continuous action or if the action is still occurring at the time of speaking
which all use different sentence patterns depending on if the verb does or does not
have an object. It is important to understand how (le) is used in sentences when
lengths of time are stated. Comparing lengths of time are also covered in this unit.

This sentence means He has been out of bed for 15 minutes.

t q chung sh w fn zhng
He get out of bed 15 minutes grammar particle

This sentence means It took him 15 minutes to get up.

t q chung sh w fn zhng
He get out of bed grammar particle 15 minutes

Page 25 of 265

(Unit 32) Modifying Verbs to the manner in which actions are done ()(zhe)
This unit shows how (zhe) and (de) are used to indicate the manner in which
something is done as well as how adjectives are reduplicated to show the manner in
which actions are done.

He sits to read. / He is sitting while reading.

subject verb
(to show manner)
predicate verb object

t zu zhe kn sh
He sit read book

(Unit 33) (b) Sentences
This unit introduces how (b) is used to create Subject - Object -Verb sentences
that stress the change in the disposition of the object. This sentence pattern may not be
used unless there is a change in the disposition of the object. Extensive usage
examples are given.

Subject Object Predicate Verb + other elements
doer of the action receiver of the action the action

w b l w bo shng le

I b gift / gifts wrap completed action

(Unit 34) (bi) Sentences
This unit introduces how (bi) is used to create passive sentences that use the
Subject - Object Verb sentence pattern. Extensive usage examples are given.

My bicycle was stolen by a thief.

Subject Object
( of )
Predicate Verb + other elements
receiver of the action doer of the action the action

w de zxngch bi xio tu tu
le

My bicycle thief steal completed action

Page 26 of 265

Unit 1
Greetings, Names, Titles
This unit teaches common ways of saying hello, asking simple questions and how
titles are used.

New Words
1.

b
no
2.

gu
expensive, honorable, to be named (family name)
3.

ho
good
4.

hu
flower
5.

jio
to be called
6.

lo
old (people and animals - not objects)
7.

lo sh
teacher
8.

L
plum, a common surname
9.

ma
modal particle used at the end of a sentence to
change a statement into a question
10.

Mng
bright, a given name
11.

mng zi
name
12.

n
you
13.

nn
you (formal, indicating respect)
14.

n sh
Madam, lady, respectful way to address a woman
that is older than yourself
15.

qng
please
16.

shn me
what
17.

sh
is, are, am
18.

Wng
king, a common surname
19.

Wi
great, a common given name
20.

wn
ask
21.

w
I, me
22.

xin sheng
mister, gentleman
23.

xio
little, small
24.

xio ji
young lady, Miss (title)
25.

xng
surname
26.

zi jin
good bye
27.

Zhng
a common surname

Page 27 of 265

Addressing friends, family, and coworkers
Names are written and spoken using surnames first. In China, when women marry
they do not change their surnames. Children have the same surnames as their fathers,
a few have the same surnames as their mothers. Family names are usually one
character, but may be two characters. Given names are usually one or two characters.
Friends will address each other by their full names. At work, colleagues address each
other using surnames preceded by titles or sometimes full names are used. Sometimes
young adults may be addressed by (xio) preceding their surnames and old people
by (lo) preceding their surnames. Superiors are addressed by their surnames
followed by their titles. For instance, "Hello, Wang Teacher" is a common greeting
used by students when addressing their teachers.

Wng xin sheng Mr. Wang
lo Wng Old Wang
L xio ji Miss Li
xio Wng Little Wang
Wng lo sh Teacher Wang
Zhng Mng Mng Zhang Ming Ming (full name)
Wng n sh
Madam Wang (respectful way to address
a woman older than yourself)

Hello!
Whether meeting an old acquaintance or a friend, a common greeting in China is
(n ho). This literally means "you good" but conveys the meaning of "hello".
(zi jin), which literally means "again see", is used to say good bye.

Statements
nn ho
Hello! (respectful)
n ho
Hello! (familiar)
zi jin
Goodbye!

Names may be stated in three ways:

w sh (full name)
I am (full name)

w jio (full name)
I am called (full name)

w xng (surname)
My surname name is (surname)

Negative Statements
To make a negative statement, place (b) before (sh). In the examples below,
note that (b) is spoken in the second tone. This character changes tones when it
precedes a fourth tone character. (refer to Appendix A)
Page 28 of 265

w b sh (full name)
I am not (full name).

w b jio (full name)
I am not called (full name)

w b xng (surname)
My surname name is not
(surname)
Questions
(nn) is used to show respect for a person's position, age, or simply an extra show
of politeness. The following questions are polite, show respect, and could be used in
professional environments.

1.

May I ask, your honorable surname?
2.

My surname is L. What is your honorable
family name?

1. qng wn, nn gu xng ?
2. w xng. L. nn gu xng ?

To ask someone their name in the following way is very informal, used in casual
social situations, it should not be used in professional environments.

1.
?
What is your name?

1. n jio shnme mngzi ?

questions
Adding (ma) to the end of a statement creates a yes-no question.

1.
How are you?
2.
, May I ask, are you Mr. Wng?
3.
Are you Mr. Wang?
4.
Are you Miss L?
5.
Are you Teacher Wang?

1. n ho ma?
2. qng wn, nn sh Wng xinsheng ma?
3. nn sh Wng xinsheng ma?
4. nn sh L xio ji ma?
5.
nn sh Wng losh ma

Page 29 of 265

Unit 2
'To Be' Sentences
This unit introduces 'to be' sentences that deal with nouns as well as several kinds of
questions. In these sentences, (sh) is used to express 'to be'.

New Words
1.

du
all, both
2.

du
correct
3.

hi shi
or (in a question - not used in a
statement)
4.

h
and
5.

hu zh
or (in a statement - not used in a
question)
6.

mi gu
the USA
7.

mi gu rn
American citizen
8.

men
a suffix added to pronouns
indicating plural
9.

n
which
10.

ne
modal particle used at the end of a
sentence to create a question in a
soft tone
11.

n men
you (plural)
12.

rn
person
13.

shu (shi) who (commonly pronounced shi)
14.

t
he
15.

t
she
16.

t men
they (for a group of both females
and males)
17.

t men
they (females)
18.

w men
we
19.

xu sheng
student
20.

y
also
21.

yng gu
England
22.

yng gu rn
British citizen
23.

zn men
we
24.

zhng gu
China
25.

zhng gu rn
Chinese citizen

In this text, we have used the more common pronunciation (shi) for the character
instead of (shu).
Page 30 of 265

'To Be' - a noun
Pronouns, (w), (t) (n) and (nn), can be made plural by adding
(men) immediately after them. In the examples below, (w) may be replaced by
(n), (t), (t), or by the name of a person; (w men) may be replaced by
(zn men), (n men), (t men) or (t men). (zn men) is used
to indicate that we only refers the people involved in the immediate conversation.

And / Also / All (Statements)
There is no special word for "both" in Chinese. (du) is used to express "both" as
well as "all". In the examples below, (du) is optional.

1.

I am a student.
2.

I am Zhng Mng Mng.
3.

I am also a student.
4.

We are students.
5.

We are also students.
6.

We are (all / both) students.
7.

He and I are students.
8.

He and I are both students.
9.

Miss Li and Mr. Wang are teachers.
10.

Miss Li and Mr. Wang are both
teachers.
11.

Miss Li and us are all teachers.

1. w sh xusheng.
2. w sh Zhng Mngmng.
3. w y sh xusheng.
4. wmen sh xusheng.
5. wmen y sh xusheng.
6. wmen du sh xusheng.
7. t h w sh xusheng.
8. t h w du sh xusheng.
9. L xioji h Wng xinsheng du sh losh.
10. L xioji h Wng xinsheng sh losh.
11. L xioji h wmen du sh losh.

OR - Statements
To make a statements that use "or", (hu zh) is used, (hi sh) is only used
for forming questions which are discussed below.

Page 31 of 265

1. She is a teacher or a student.
2. He is British or American.

1. t huzh sh xusheng huzh sh losh.
2. t huzh sh ynggurn huzh sh migurn.

Negative Statements
To make a negative statement, place (b) before (sh). In the examples below,
(w) may be replaced by (n), (t), (t), or by the name of a person;
(wmen) may be replaced by (zn men), (nmen), (tmen) or
(tmen).
1.

I am not a student.
2.

I am not a student either.
3.

We are not students.
4.

We are not students either.
5.

(None / neither) of us are students.

1. w b sh xusheng.
2. w y b sh xusheng.
3. wmen b sh xusheng.
4. wmen y b sh xusheng.
5. wmen du b sh xusheng.

Questions
(ma) questions
(ma) is placed at the end of a statement to create a yes-no question.

1.

Are you a student?
2.

Is he a student?
3.

Is she a teacher?
4.

Is he a student also?
5.

Are they all students?

1. n sh xusheng ma?
2.
t sh xusheng ma
3.
t sh losh ma
4.
t y sh xushng ma
5.
tmen du sh xushng ma

Page 32 of 265

(ne) questions
(ne) is placed at the end of a sentence to ask a yes-no question about the beginning
of the sentence.

1. I am a student, what about you?
2. He is a student, is L Wi?

1. w sh xusheng, n ne ?
2. t sh xusheng, L Wi ne ?

'question-word' questions
Questions, that use question words, use the same word order as statements; except the
question word is used in place of expected answer. In the examples below, question
words (shi / shu) and (n) are used to create questions in this way.

1.

Who is he?
2.

What is your nationality?
3.

Who is Mr. Wang?

1. t sh shi?
2. n sh n gu rn?
3.
shi sh Wng xinshng

'affirmative - negative' questions
Statements using (sh) may be changed into affirmative-negative pattern questions
by replacing (sh) with (sh bu sh). In this sentence pattern, (ma) may
not be used. (Notice that (bu) is spoken using the neutral tone.)

n sh bu sh xusheng?
Are you a student?

'confirmation' questions
If speakers make statements they think are true, and want to confirm that they are true;
(sh bu sh) or (du bu du) are added to the end of statements. Both
phrases have the same meaning. This is true for any positive or negative statements.
(Notice that (bu) is spoken using the neutral tone.)

1.

You are a student, aren't you?
2.

You are not a teacher, are you?
3.

He is not a student, is he?

Page 33 of 265

1. n sh xusheng, sh bu sh ?
2.
n b sh loshdu bu du
3.
t sh xushengsh bu sh

'or' questions
To make questions that use "or", (hi sh) is used, (hu zh) is not used in
questions, it is only used in statements which are discussed above.

1.

Is he a teacher or a student?
2.

Is he British or American?

1.
t sh xusheng hishi losh
2.
t sh ynggurn hishi migurn
Page 34 of 265

Unit 3
Showing Possession (de)
This unit introduces how to express possessive conditions and family relationships.
Notice the syllables that have no tone marks, they are spoken in the neutral tone.

New Words
1.

b ba
father
2.

de
particle to indicate possession
3.

d di
younger brother
4.

din no
computer
5.

g ge
older brother
6.

jio sh
classroom
7.

ji jie
older sister
8.

ji mi
sister
9.

m ma
mother
10.

mi mei
younger sister
11.

n
that
12.

nn png you
boyfriend
13.

n png you
girlfriend
14.

png you
friend
15.

sh
book
16.

tng xu
classmate
17.

xio zhng
headmaster, school principle
18.

xing d
brother
19.

xu xio
school
20.

zh
this

Showing Possession
The particle (de) is placed after a person or thing that posses something to express
a possessive condition.

w de sh
my book

wmen de xuxio
our school

xuxio de dinno
school's computer

zh sh w de sh.
This is my book.

zh sh wmen de xuxio.
This is our school.

Page 35 of 265

When referring to close family relationships, (de) is often omitted
1.

This is my (older) sister.
2.

This is my sister's book.

1. zh sh w jijie.
2. zh sh w jijie de sh.

If there are several possessive relationships in one sentence and it is obvious from the
context what the possessive relationships are, then (de) is often omitted. In
sentence number 1 below, (de) is not used between (w men) and (xu
xio). In sentence 2 below, (de) is not used between (w) and (png you).

1.

This is our school's computer.
2.

This is my friends's computer.

1. zh sh wmen xuxio de dinno.
2. zh sh w pngyou de dinno.

When Chinese speakers are trying to clarify which character they are speaking; for
instance when reading a list of names over the telephone, they will us (de) in the
following way.

pngyou de png

In English this would be the same as - (png) as in (png you)

Negative Statements
To say that the state of possession does not exist, place (b) before (sh).

Mr. Wang is not our school's headmaster.

Wng xinsheng b sh wmen xuxio de xiozhng.

Questions
questions
1.
?
Is this is your big sister's book.
2.

Is this your (plural) classroom?

1. zh sh n jijie de sh ma?
2. zh sh nmen de jiosh ma?

Page 36 of 265

'question word' questions
n sh shi de sh? Whose book is that?

? zh sh bu sh n de sh? Is this your book?

1.
,
This is your book, isn't it?
2.
,
This is your book, isn't it?

1.
zh sh n de sh, sh bu sh
2.
zh sh n de sh, du bu du

'or' questions
Is this your book or his book?

zh sh n de sh hishi t de sh

Page 37 of 265

Unit 4
Numbers and Measure Words
This unit introduces counting numbers up to 100 and how measure words are used.
(For very large and very small numbers refer to Appendix E. For using measure words to express
one half, one and a half, and indeterminate quantities refer to Appendix B)

New Words
1.

bo zh
newspaper
2.

bn
measure word for books
3.

c din
dictionary
4.

g
general purpose measure word
5.

li equivalent to (ling g)
6.

ling
measure word for vehicles and bicycles
7.

qin b
pencil
8.

yun zh b
ballpoint pen
9.

zhng
measure word for newspapers and pieces
of paper
10.

zh
measure word for pens and pencils
11.

z xng ch
bicycle

Numbers
0

lng 6

li 13

sh sn
1

y 7

q 14

sh s
2

r 8

b 15

sh w
2

ling 9

ji 16

sh li
3

sn 10

sh 17

sh q
4

s 11

sh y 18

sh b
5

w 12

sh r 19

sh ji

For numbers from 21 to 99, state the ten's place then add the one's place directly after.

20

21

29

r sh r sh y r sh ji

30

sn sh 70

q sh
40

s sh 80

b sh
50

w sh 90

ji sh
60

li sh 100

y bi

Page 38 of 265

The number one
When speaking telephone numbers and bus numbers that are over three digits; the
number one () (y) is pronounced "yo". This avoids confusion with the number
seven () (q).

The number two
Notice in the numbers above, there are two ways to say the number two. When
specifying a quantity of two, (ling) is used. When "two" appears in the ones or
tens place , (r) is used. When two appears in the hundreds place, either (r) or
(ling) may be used.

2

r
12

sh r
20

r sh
200
/
r bi / ling bi

Measure Words
There are no articles (a, an, the) in Chinese. When specifying a number of nouns,
measure words (, ling c), sometimes called 'classifiers', are used. In English,
this is comparable to "piece" in a "piece of cake" or "sheet" in a "sheet of paper".
There are over 140 measure words and they are required for almost all nouns in
Mandarin. The measure word (g) can be used to refer to anything. It isn't
considered good Chinese but it will get your meaning across. To indicate a quantity of
two, (ling) is used, (r) is not used with measure words. Therefore, one (of
something) is (y g), two is (ling g) and three is (sn g).

ling zh qinb
two pencils

sn bn sh
three books

s ling zxngch
four bicycles

w g xusheng
five students

ling zhng bozh
two newspapers

sh r g yu
12 months

r sh s g xiosh
24 hours

When a noun being referred to is obvious, sometimes measure words are used alone.
For instance, when answering the question "How many books do you have?" A person
might answer (ling bn)". A customer might point to a newspaper and tell a
store clerk, " (y zhng)". No measure word is used if a possessive pronoun is
used immediately before a noun as in the sentence, "This is my book." .
(zh sh wde sh). (li) has the same meaning as (ling g) as in this
sentence, Those two are good friends., . (tmen li sh ho
pngyou.)
Page 39 of 265

Unit 5
Adjectives
This unit deals with how to use adjectives to modify nouns. It describes one sentence
pattern that does not use a verb and also introduces multi-syllabic words in
affirmative-negative questions.
New Words
1.

i
short
2.

d
big
3.

d y
coat
4.

d gu
Germany
5.

fng
square
6.

fi chng
very, extremely
7.

go
tall
8.

go xng
happy, pleased
9.

hn
very
10.

hng
red
11.

jin
measure word for articles of clothing
12.

ji
old (things not people or animals)
13.

ln
lazy
14.

lu
building
15.

mng
busy
16.

n xi
those
17.

nn kn
ugly
18.

pio liang
pretty
19.

qn kui
diligent, hardworking
20.

r bn
Japan
21.

shu gu
fruit
22.

ti
too
23.

xn
new
24.

xn xin
fresh
25.

yng wn
English language
26.

yun
round
27.

zh xi
these
28.

zhu zi
table
29.

zu
measure word for buildings

Note: Some two character words appear to be adjective-noun combinations, but they
Page 40 of 265

are not; for instance: (d rn) (adult) and (d y) (coat) are two-character
nouns.

To Be an Adjective
If the entire predicate is an adjective, then no verb is needed in the sentence and the
predicate adjective must be modified to show degree. In sentences of this kind the
adverb (hn) is used for grammatical correctness but does not carry any meaning.
In these kinds of sentences, to clearly modify the adjective to express very, other
adverbs such as (ti) and (fi chng) are used (sentences 2 and 3).

(w) may be replaced by (n), (t), (t), or by the name of a person;
(w men) may be replaced by (zn men), (n men), (t men) or
(t men).

1.

I am busy.
2.

We are very busy.
3.

I am very busy.
4.

I am also busy.
5.

We all are busy.
6.

My table is round.
7.

Our table is old.
8.

My coat is ugly.
9.

Your coat is pretty.
10.

This bicycle is big.
11.

This bicycle is small.

1.
w hn mng.
2.
w fichng mng.
3.
w fichng mng.
4.
w y hn mng.
5.
wmen du hn mng.
6.
wde zhuzi hn yun.
7.
wmen de zhuzi hn ji.
8.
wde dy hn nnkn.
9.
nde dy hn pioliang.
10.
zh ling zxngch hn d.
11.
zh ling zxngch hn xio.

Page 41 of 265

If the entire predicate is an adjective, the adjective may remain unmodified if a direct
comparison is being made.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1. He is diligent. He is lazy.
2. This book is big. That book is small.
3. My table is old. Your table is new.
4. My table is round. Your table is square.
5. My coat is ugly. Your coat is pretty.

1. t qnkui. t ln.
2. zh bn sh d. n bn sh xio.
3. wde zhuzi ji. nde zhuzi xn.
4. wde zhuzi yun. nde zhuzi fng.
5. wde dy nnkn. nde dy pioling.

Negative Statements
If the entire predicate is an adjective, then (b) goes before the adjective. The
adjective does not need to be modified to show degree, but it can be. In negative
statements, unlike positive statements, (hn) does carry meaning.

1. I am not busy.
2. I am not busy either.
3. We are not too busy.
4. None of us are busy.
5. China is not small.
6. Japan is not big.
7. My table is not round.
8. My table is not very old.
9. My coat is not ugly.

1. w b mng.
2. w y b mng.
3. wmen b ti mng.
Page 42 of 265

4. wmen du b mng.
5. zhnggu b xio.
6. rbn b d.
7. wde zhuzi b yun.
8. wde zhuzi b ti ji.
9. wde dy b nnkn.
Questions
questions
When asking (ma) questions, if the entire predicate is an adjective, (hn) does
carry meaning but is optional.

1. Are you busy?
2. You arent busy?
3. Are you very busy?
4. Are you also very busy?

1. n mng ma?
2.
n b mng ma
3. n hn mng ma?
4. n y hn mng ma?

questions
1.

I am not busy, what about you?
2.

We are busy, and you (plural)?

1. w b mng, n ne?
2. wmen hn mng, nmen ne?

affirmative negative questions
Single Character Adjectives
Questions using adjectives may also be created using the affirmative-negative pattern.
In this case, adverb modifiers such as (hn) may not be used. Likewise, (ma)
may not be used.

n mng bu mng?
Are you busy?

t go bu go?
Is he tall?

Two Character Adjectives
If the entire predicate is a two character adjective, then there are two ways to create
affirmative-negative questions. In the first sentence below, both characters of the
adjective are repeated. In the second sentence, only the first character is repeated.
Page 43 of 265

n goxng bu goxng
Are you happy?
n go bu goxng
Are you happy?

confirmation questions
1.

You are busy, arent you?
2.

You arent busy, are you?

1.
n mngsh bu sh
2.
n b mngdu bu du

or questions
1.

Is he tall or short?
2.

Is your computer old or new?

1.
t go hishi i
2.
nde dinno xn hishi ji

General Rules for Modifying Nouns
Absolute Condition
This sentence pattern is used to state an absolute condition, such as true, false or
square. A monosyllabic or multi-syllabic adjective may be used. The adjective may
not be modified. This sentence means, My table is round.

subject (sh) adjective (de)

wde zhuzi sh yun de.

Negative Statements
When making a negative statement, using the (sh)(de) sentence pattern,
place (b) before (sh).

1.

My table is not round.
2.

My table is not old.
3.

Her coat is not pretty.

1. wde zhuzi b sh yun de.
2. wde zhuzi b sh ji de.
3. tde dy b sh xn de.

Page 44 of 265

Questions
(ma) questions

Is your table round?

nde zhuzi sh yun de ma

(ne) questions

My table is old, and yours?

wde zhuzi sh ji dende ne


Is your table round?

nde zhuzi sh bu sh yun de

(sh bu sh) and (du bu du) are not be used with the (sh)(de)
sentence pattern.

or questions
Is your computer old or new?

nde dinno sh xn de hishi ji de

Using with Adjectives
Absolute Condition
The following examples show how to use (de), when an absolute condition is being
stated. In these sentences the adjective is not modified to show degree, for example,
when referring to a specific thing, such as the tall building or the pretty coat. In
these kinds of sentences, measure words precedes the adjectives.

IF the adjective is a single character(de) is not used.

go lu tall building

IF the adjective consists of more than one character(de) is usually used

pioliang de dy pretty coat

1. This tall building is our companys.
Page 45 of 265

2. That pretty coat is hers.

1. zh zu go lu sh wmen gngs de.
2. n jin pioliang de dy sh tde.

Adjectives that are Modified by Degree
When (hn), (ti), (fi chng) or other adverbs that express degree are
used, (de) is always needed. In this case, (hn) carries meaning.

IF the adjective consists of one or two-characters (de) is used.

fichng go de lu
very tall building

hn pioliang de dy
very pretty coat

1.
2.

1. This very tall building is our companys.
2. That pretty coat is hers.

1. zh zu fichng go de lu sh wmen gngs de.
2. n jin pioliang de dy sh tde.

Using with Adjectives
(is optional)
As discussed above (de) is usually used with two syllable adjectives, however, there
are situations where (de) is optional. If the topic of conversation or context of the
statement makes it very clear that the adjective modifies the noun after it, (de) is
not used. For instance, if the topic of conversation were cars (dgu
ch) would be used to say German cars.

Measure Words and Adjectives
When measure words are used with nouns that are modified with an adjective, the
word order is:
number measure word adjective noun.

1.

ling zh xn qinb
2.

sn bn yngwn sh
3.

s ling ji zxngch
4.

w ge goxng de xusheng

Page 46 of 265

1.
two new pencils
2.
three English books
3.
four old bicycles
4.
five happy students
Example Sentences

When referring to that or this (thing) measure words are needed (sentences 3-6).
When referring to these or those (things) (sentences 7 and 8) measure words are
not needed.

1. Your table is old.
2. Her coat is red.
3. That old computer is mine.
4. That ugly coat is mine.
5. That very old computer is mine.
6. That very pretty coat is hers.
7. Those computers are ours.
8. These computers are ours.

1. nde zhuz sh ji de.
2. tde dy sh hng de.
3. n ti ji dinno sh wde.
4. n jin nnkn de dy sh wde.
5. n ti hn ji de dinno sh wde.
6. n jin hn pioliang de dy sh tde.
7. nxi dinno sh wmende
8. zhxi dinno sh wmende

Page 47 of 265

Unit 6
Comparisons
This unit introduces the sentence patterns used to compare things that are different,
state that two things are the same, express relatively / comparatively and state
progressive changes.

New Words
1.

bi zi
cup
2.

b
(something) compared to (something)
3.

b jio
relatively, comparatively
4.

b r
not as (comparison standard) as
5.

chng
long, length
6.

chng sh
city
7.

d xio
size
8.

de du
a lot
9.

d
low
10.

d t
map
11.

dng tin
winter
12.

d
degree (temperature)
13.

du le
a lot
14.

fng jin
room
15.

fng zi
house,apartment,building,room
16.

H r bn
a city in northeastern China
17.

hi zi
child
18.

Hng zhu
a city in southeastern China
19.

ji qin
price
20.

jn tin
today
21.

jng yn
to be experienced
22.

k
measure word for trees
23.

kun
wide
24.

lng
cold
25.

n me
that much
26.

ni yu
New York
27.

pin yi
inexpensive
28.

png gu
apple
29.

r
hot
30.

rn ku
population
Page 48 of 265

31.

shng yn
voice, sound
32.

sh
tree
33.

tin qi
weather
34.

tio
measure word for roads
35.

xi tin
summer
36.

xing jio
banana
37.

xng f.
happiness
38.

y dinr
a little bit
29.

y xi
some
40.

y yng
the same
41.

yn yu
music
42.

yu li yu
used to state a progression
43.

zh me
this much
44.

zhun y
university major
45.

zu tin
yesterday

Sentence Patterns for Comparisons
Comparing two things
A is greater than B A

B comparison standard
A is greater than B A

B comparison standard degree
A is not greater than B A

A is not greater than B A

A is as _____ as B A

A is not as _____ as B A


Stating two things are the same
A is the same as B
A
/
B

A
/
B

comparison standard

Stating two things are not the same
A is the not same as B
A
/
B

A
/
B

comparison standard

Stating a relative condition
A is relatively (standard of comaparison)
A

standard

Stating a progressive condition
A is progressing in (standard of comaparison)
A

standard
Page 49 of 265

Comparing Two Things ()
When using (b) to compare two things (A and B), the first thing mentioned, is the
greater of the two. The standard of comparison is stated last. Adverbs such as (hn)
and (fi chng) cannot be used to modify the comparison standard. The degree
of difference may be stated but is optional. When stating the degree of difference, an
exact number or an approximation may be used. When stating an approximation,
(y dinr) and (y xi) are used for small differences while (de du) and
(du le) are used for relatively large differences.

A B
comparison standard degree
1.

2.

3.

4.

1.
Today is colder than yesterday.
jntin b zutin lng.
2.
Today is 5 degrees colder than
yesterday.
jntin b zutin lng w d.
3.
Today is much colder than
yesterday.
jntin b zutin lng de du.
4.
Today is a little colder than
yesterday.
jntin b zutin lng y dinr.

1. Mr. Wang is taller than me.
2. His voice is lower than mine.
3. Apples are cheaper than bananas.
4. He is more experienced than I am.

1. Wng xinsheng b w go.
2. tde shngyn b wde shngyn d.
3. pnggu b xingjio pinyi.
4. t b w yu jngyn.

To compare two things (A and B) and the first thing mentioned (A), is the lesser of the
two, (b b) is used; however, this pattern is only used to express disagreement
or refutation. The standard of comparison is stated last. Adverbs such as (hn) and
(fi chng) cannot be used to modify the comparison standard.
Page 50 of 265

A


Mr. Wang is not taller than me. Wng xinsheng b b w go.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.
He is not more experienced than I am.
2.
His Chinese is not better than yours.
3.
Winter in Beijing is not warmer than Shanghai.
4.
This coat is not newer than that one.

1. t bb w yu jngyn.
2. tde hny bb nde hny ho.
3. Bijng de xitin bb Shnghi de xitin r.
4. zh jin dy bb n jin xn.

Questions
questions
Adding (ma) to the end of a (b) statement creates a question.

Is today colder than yesterday?

jntin b zu tin lng ma

Statements using (b) may be changed into affirmative-negative questions by
replacing (b) with (b bu b). In this sentence pattern, (ma) cannot be
used.

Is winter in Beijing colder than in
New York?

Bijng de dngtin bbub niyu de dngtin lng

Page 51 of 265

Comparing Two Things ()
To compare two things (A and B) and the first thing mentioned (A), is the lesser of the
two, (b r) is normally used. The standard of comparison is stated last. Adverbs
such as (hn) and (fi chng) cannot be used to modify the comparison
standard.

A B
comparison standard

I am not as tall as him. w br t go.

1. This cup isnt as big as that one.
2. This street is not as wide as that street.

1. zh ge bizi br n ge bizi d.
2. zh tio l br n tio l kun.

Questions
questions
Adding (ma) to the end of a (b r) statement creates a question.

This street is not as wide as that street (is it)?

zh tio l br n tio l kun ma

Comparing Two Things
A is equal to or greater than B ()
A is less than B ()
When comparing two things (A and B), and the first thing mentioned (A), is equal to
or greater than (B); (yu) is used. The standard of comparison is stated last.
Adverbs such as (hn) and (fi chng) cannot be used to modify the
comparison standard. In this sentence pattern, (n me) and (zh me) are
optional and may be used before the comparison standard.

He is at least as tall as you.

A B comparison standard

t yu n
go

1.

That tree is at least as tall that
building.
Page 52 of 265

2.

His little brother is at least as tall
as I am.
3.

This building is at least as tall as
that building.
4.

Shanghai is as cold as this (in
Beijing).
5.

Shanghai is as cold as that (in
Beijing).

1. n k xio sh yu n zu fngzi nme go.
2. t ddi yu w zhme go.
3. zh zu lu yu n zu lu nme go.
4. Shnghi yu Bijng zhme lng.
5. Shnghi yu Bijng nme lng.

A is less than B
When comparing two things, the following pattern is used to express A is less than B,
(mi) or (mi yu) may be used. The standard of comparison is stated last.
Adverbs such as (hn) and (fi chng) cannot be used with the comparison
standard.
He is not as tall as me.

A () B
comparison standard

()

t mi(yu) w
go

1. Winter in Beijing is not as cold as Harbin.
2.
Hangzhous population is not as big as
Beijings.
3. My little sister is not as tall as I am.

1. Bijng de dngtin miyu Hrbn lng.
2. Hngzhu de rnku miyu Bijng du
3. w mimei miyu w go.

Questions
questions
Adding (ma) to the end of a (yu) statement creates a question.

Is he as tall as you?
t yu n go ma

1. Is this room as big as that one?
Page 53 of 265

2. Is Shanghai as cold as Beijing?
3. Is Shanghai as cold as this (in Beijing)?
4. Is Shanghai as cold as that (in Beijing)?

1.
zh ge fngjin yu n ge fngjin d ma
2.
Shnghi yu Bijng lng ma
3.
Shnghi yu Bijng zhme lng ma
4.
Shnghi yu Bijng ame lng ma

Statements using (yu) or (mi yu) may use the (yu mi yu)
affirmative-negative question pattern. In this sentence pattern, (ma) may not be
used.

Is he as tall as you?
t yu mi yu n go

1.

Is Shanghai as cold as this (in Beijing)?
2.

Is Shanghai as cold as that (in Beijing)?

1.
Shnghi yu mi yu Bijng zhme lng ma
2.
Shnghi yu mi yu Bijng ame lng ma

Stating Two Things are the Same ( / )
When stating that two things are the same, A and B, both things are linked with
(gn) or (h) followed by ( y yng). This means that (A is the same as B). The
comparison standard is optional. A measure word may be used alone, without a noun,
in the second phrase of (sentence 2).

A / B
comparison
standard
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.
This map is the same as that map.
2.
This map is the same as that map.
3.
This maps size is the same as that maps size.
4.
This map is the same size as that map.
Page 54 of 265

5.
This maps price is the same as that maps price.

1. zh zhng dt gn n zhng dt yyng.
2. zh zhng dt h n zhng yyng.
3. zh zhng dt dxio h n zhng dt yyng.
4. zh zhng dt gn n zhng yyng d.
5. zh zhng dt gn n zhng dt jiqin yyng.

1. Your book is the same as his.
2. This table is the same as that one.
3.
We have the same number of children

as they do.
4. I am the same height as he is.

1. nde sh h tde yyng.
2. zh zhng zhuzi gn n zhng zhuzi yyng.
3. wmen de hizi gn tmen de yyng du.
4. w gn t yyng go.

Stating Two Things are the not Same ()
When stating that two things are not the same, both things are linked with (gn) or
(h) and followed by (b y yng). These sentences mean : A is not the same
as B.
A / B
comparison
standard
1.

2.

1.
This map is the not the same as that map.
2.
This map is the not the same size as that map.

1. zh zhng dt gn n zhng dt b yyng.
2. zh zhng dt h n zhng dt b yyng d.

3.

Today is not the same as
yesterday.
4.

Hainans weather is not the same
as Beijings.
5.

His major is not the same as mine.
6.

This suit is not the same length as
that one.
7.

Little Zhang is not the same
height as little Wang.
Page 55 of 265

3. jntin h zutin b yyng.
4. Hinn de qhu gn Bijng b yyng.
5. t xu de zhuny h w b yyng.
6. zh jin xfu gn n jin xfu b yyng chng.
7. xio Zhng gn xio Wng b yyng go.

Questions
questions

1.

Is this map the same as that
map?
2.

Is this map the same size as
that map?

1.
zh zhng dt gn n zhng dt yyng ma
2.
zh ge dt gn n ge dt b yyng d ma

In statements ending with (y yng) or (b y yng), putting
(y yng b y yng) at the end of a the sentence creates a yes-no
question.

The word (yfu) means clothing but, if it is clear to the listener what article of
clothing is being discussed, it can be used for any specific article of clothing. In
sentence 1, (dy) (coat) could replace (yfu).

1.

Are this coat and that
coat the same?
2.

Are these maps the
same?
3.

Are these two books the
same price?
4.

Is the weather in Beijing
the same as in Shanghai?

1.
zh jin yfu h n jin yfu yyng bu yyng
2.
zh zhng dt h n zhng dt yyng bu yyng
3.
zh ling bn sh de jiqin yyng bu yyng
4.
Bijng de tinqi h Shnghi de tinqi yyng bu yyng

Page 56 of 265

Relatively / Comparatively ()
To state that something (A) is relatively (standard of comparison), the following
sentnece pattern is used:

A
standard of comparison
1.

2.

1. zh ge chngsh bjio d.
This is a relatively big city.
2. tde qch bjio gu.
His car is relatively expensive.

Progression
(yu li yu) is used to show that something (A) changes as time goes on.

A
standard of comparison
1.

2.

3.

1. tinqi yuliyu lng.
2. tmen de sh yuliyu du.
3. wmen shnghu yuliyu xngf.

1.
The weather is getting colder.
2.
They are getting more and more books.
3.
Our lives are getting happier.

Page 57 of 265

Unit 7
To Have () Sentences
This unit introduces (yu) as it is used to express to have. How to make
statements and questions that express to have and do not have are given. Stating
quantities such as some and a few as well as asking questions such as, how
much? are covered.

New Words
1.

du shao
how many? how much?
2.

f wn
French (language)
3.

hn du
many
4.

j
several, how many?
5.

mi yu
do not have
6.

yu
have
7.

zhng wn
Chinese (language)

To Have () Sentences
Measure Words
In sentences below, (yu) is used to express to have. Measure words are used
with, this [ (zh)], that [(n)] or several [( j)]. (j) indicates a
relatively small quantity, usually 10 or less.

1.

I have a book.
2.

He has two books.
3.

I have several books.
4.

I have an English book.

1. w yu y bn sh.
2. t yu ling bn sh.
3. w yu j bn sh.
4. w yu y bn yngwn sh.

Measure words are not used when expressing some [ (y xi)], these [
(zh xi)], those [ (n xi)] or many [ (hndu)].

1. I have some English books.
2. I have many books.
3. These Chinese books are mine.
4. Those books are his.

1. w yu yxi yngwn sh.
Page 58 of 265

2. w yu hndu sh.
3. zhxi zhngwn sh sh wde.
4. nxi sh sh tde.

Negative Statements
To express dont have place before . In this case, measure words are not used.

1.

I do not have any books.
2.

I do not have a bicycle.

1. w miyu sh.
2. w miyu zxngch.

Questions
questions
To ask the question, Do you have any? a measure word is not used. If a number is
stated a measure word must be used.

Do you have any books? n yu sh ma?

questions

w yu y bn sh, n ne?

I have a book, do you?

question word questions
(j) not only means several, it is also a question word, meaning how many?.
When using (j) in a question, a measure word is used between (j) and the noun.
(j) questions have the same word order as statements; except the question word
(j) is used in place of the expected answer. This means that (t yu j
bn sh) could mean He has several books. or How many books does he have?,
depending on the context of the sentence. In (j) questions, (ma) is not used.

n yu j bn sh? How many books do you have?
w yu j bn sh. I have several books.

Page 59 of 265

When asking how many, (du shao) may be used for any number; however, is
usually used for numbers over 10. When using (du shao) the measure word is
optional. In (du shao) questions, (ma) is not used. Both questions below
mean How many students does you school have?

1.

2.

1. nmen xuxio yu dushao ge xusheng?
2. nmen xuxio yu dushao xusheng?

(yu mi yu) is used to create a question that asks, do you have any?, in
these questions numbers and measure words are not used.

n yu mi yu sh? Do you have any books?

You dont have a Chinese book, do you?

n miyu zhngwn shdu bu du

or questions
Do you have a pencil or a ballpoint pen?

n yu qinb hishi yunzhb.

Page 60 of 265

Unit 8
Days and Dates
This unit introduces statements and questions concerning days, days, weeks, months,
years and dates.

New Words
1.

ho
number (expressing a day)
2.

jn nin
this year
3.

l bi
week
4.

mng nin
next year
5.

mng tin
tomorrow
6.

nin
year
7.

q nin
last year
8.

r
day
9.

shng ge xng q
last week
10.

shng ge yu
last month
11.

shng r
birthday
12.

tin
day
13.

xi ge xng q
next week
14.

xi ge yu
next month
15.

xng q
week
16.

xu q
term, semester
17.

yu
month
18.

zh ge xng q
this week
19.

zh ge yu
this month
20.

zhu
week

Months and Days
The names of the 12 months are formed by combining the numbers 1 to 12 with
(yu). (Note: (yu fn) may also be used) The numbers from 1 to 6 follow
(xng q), (l bi) or (zhu) to express the days of the week from Monday to
Saturday. Sunday is spoken using (xng q tin), (l bi tin) or
(zhu tin) and written as (xng q r), (l bi r) or (zhu r).

January

July

February

August

March

September

April

October
Page 61 of 265

May

November

June

December

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

Sunday (spoken)

Sunday (written)

Dates and Years
When expressing the date - the day follows the month. The day is expressed by
combining numbers 1 to 31 with (ho) (spoken form ) or (r) (written form).

b yu b ho
August 8 (spoken)

b yu b r
August 8 (written)

The four figures making up the a year are read out as four separate numbers with
(nin) at the end. While (lng) is the character for "zero", the numeral is usually
used when writing the year. When expressing a year, (r) is used, (ling) cannot
be used.

2 0 1 0
r lng y lng nin
the year 2010

The word order for expressing the complete date goes from largest unit to smallest.
Friday, August 8, 2008 would be expressed as follows:

2008 8 8

r lng lng b nin b yu b ho xngqw

Note: The words year [ (nin)], week [ (zhu)], day [ (tin)], minute [ (fn)],
and second [ (mio)] are nouns of quantity and are not used with measure words. The words
month [ (yu)], week [ (xng q)], week [ (lbi)] and hour [ (xio sh)]
are not nouns of quantity and require measure words. (Refer to Appendix B Advanced Measure
Words)
Page 62 of 265

ling nin
2 years

w tin
5 days

s ge xngq
4 weeks

s zhu
4 weeks

sn ge yu
3 months

In the examples below, (j) could mean "a few" or "how many?", depending on the
context.

j nin
a few years / how many years?

j tin
a few days / how many days?

j ge xngq
a few weeks / how many weeks?

j ge yu
a few months / how many months?

1.

Yesterday was October 18
th
.
2.

Today is October 19
th
.
3.

Tomorrow will be October 20
th
.
4.
2 0 1 0
The year is 2010.
5.

Tomorrow is my birthday.

1. zutin sh shyu shb ho.
2. jntin sh shyu sh ji ho.
3. mngtin sh shyu rshr ho.
4. jnnin sh r lng y lng nin.
5. mngtin sh wde shngr.

Questions
questions
1.

Is today is February 1
st

2.

Is the 14
th
on Wednesday?

1. jntin sh r yu y ho ma?
2. shs ho sh xngqsn ma?

(j) is used as a question word to ask "what day", "what date" or "what month".
(du shao) may not be used for this. However, (dushao) or (j) may be
used to ask the number of days, weeks, months or years.
Page 63 of 265

1.
?
What is today's month, date, and day?
2.

How many days does a week have?
3.

How many days does a week have?
4.

How many months does a year have?
5.

How many weeks does a year have?
6.

How many weeks does a semester
have?

1. jntin sh jyu jho? xngqj?
2.
y g xngq yu j tin
3.
y zhu yu j tin
4. y nin yu j ge yu?
5. y nin yu dushao ge xngq?
6. y g xuq yu dushao ge xngq?


Is today February 1st ?

jntin sh bu sh ryu yho?

,
Today February 1stisn't it?

jntin sh ryu yho, sh bu sh

'or' questions

Is today Wednesday or Thurday?

jntin sh xngqsn hishi xngqs

Page 64 of 265

Unit 9
Time
This unit introduces questions and statements about lengths of time and stating the
(clock) time.

New Words
1.

bn
half
2.

ch
short of
3.

din zhng
o'clock
4.

du chng
how long? (time)
5.

fn zhng
minute
6.

j din
what time?
7.

k
a quarter of an hour
8.

kui
fast, quick
9.

shng w
morning
10.

sh jin
time
11.

wn shang
evening, late, night time
12.

xi w
afternoon
13.

xio sh
hour
14.

zo shang
morning
15.

zhng w
noon

Stating the Time
To express AM, (zo shang) is generally used to discuss early morning hours
such as before one goes to work or school. When discussing ones workday,
(shng w) is more commonly used to talk about things that happen before lunch. To
express PM, (xi w) is used for times in the afternoon and (wn shang) is
used for evening times. These expressions are placed before the (clock) time is stated.
These may be omitted if it is already clear what part of the day it is. For early morning
hours, when most people are asleep, (wn shang) is commonly used because it is
considered to be night time. When stating the time, as in "It is 2 o'clock"; (ling) is
used. When stating the time, the minutes place, as in "2 minutes after 10" (r) is
used. When stating the time of day, (kui) is used to express 'almost' and (ch)
is used to say until the hour. (k) may be used to state the 15 or 45 minute
"quarter hour" times but is not used for half hour times. (bn) may be used to state
"half past". When stating the time, (zhng) is optional; however, it is not used after
(k) or (bn). Time phrases always are stated from the largest unit of time to
the smallest unit.
Page 65 of 265

1.
()
10:00 am
2.

10:15 am
3.

10:30 am
4.

10:30 am
5.

10:45 am
6.

10:45 am
7.
()
noon
8.

12:01 pm
9.

2:02 pm
10.
()
midnight
11.
()
almost 2 oclock
12.
()
a quarter to 1 oclock
13.
()
10 minutes until 1 oclock
14.

2:45
15

3:15

1. shngw sh din (zhng)
2. shngw sh din y k
3. shngw sh din bn
4. shngw sh din snsh fn
5. shngw sh din sn k
6. shngw sh din sshw fn
7. zhngw shr din (zhng)
8. xiw shr din y fn
9. xiw ling din r fn
10. wnshng shier din (zhng)
11. kui ling din (zhng)
12. ch y k y din (zhng)
13. ch sh fn y din (zhng)
14. ling din sn k
15. sn din y k

In China, public places that have digital clocks, such as subway stations, it is common
to have the time displayed in 24 hour time format. Radio time announcements are
commonly spoken in 24 hour format. (sh s din ) would be used to express 2
pm.
Page 66 of 265

Length of Time
To express a length of time in minutes, measure words are not used. For a number of
hours, the measure word (g) is used. (The words minute [ (fn)] and
second [ (mio)] are nouns of quantity and are not used with measure words. The
word hour [ (xio sh)] is not a noun of quantity and requires a measure words.
Refer to Appendix B Advanced Measure Words)

ling fn zhng
two minutes

ling ge xiosh
two hours

Questions
questions
()
sh din (zhng) ma?
Is it 10 o'clock? (now)

()
j din (zhng)?
What time is it? (now)
?
duchng sh jin?
how long? (length of time)
?
dushao ge xiosh?
how many hours?
?
j ge xiosh?
how many hours?
?
dushao fn zhng?
how many minutes?
?
j fn zhng?
how many minutes?
Page 67 of 265

Unit 10
'Action Verb' Sentences
Habitual / Intentional Actions
This unit introduces how to express statements and questions about actions that are
habitual or intentional. It shows examples of how multisyllabic verbs are used in
affirmative-negative questions.

New Words
1.

Bijng
the capital of China
2.

d fang
a place or location
3.

din sh
television
4.

gn
to do
5.

h
drink
6.

jio zi
Chinese dumpling
7.

k fi
coffee
8.

kn
to see, to watch
9.

li
come
10.

mi
every
11.

nr
where?
12.

q
go
13.

shng din
store, shop
14.

Shng hi
Shanghai (a major city in China)
15.

shn me sh hu
when?
16.

t sh gun
library
17.

xin zi
now
18.

xu x
study
19.

yng y
English language
20.

zu
to do

Action Verbs
There are no verb tenses in Chinese, actions are expressed as habitual / intentional, in
progress, completed, or to be part of a past experience. The times actions occur are
apparent from context or are specified by time phrases at the beginning of sentences.

Habitual / Intentional Actions
This example does not refer to a specific time. The context tells the listener if the
statement refers to a habitual or intentional action.
Page 68 of 265

Habitual actions
Question: What do you do after school everyday?

Answer: w q tshgun. I go to the library.

Intentional actions
Question: (as someone walks out the door) Where are you going (now)?

Answer:

w q tshgun.
I am going to the
library.

Question: Where will you go tomorrow?

Answer: w q tshgun. I will go to the library.

Time Phrases
To express the time that actions occurs, time phrases are always placed at the
beginning of sentences or immediately following the subject. In the examples below,
(w) is the subject.

Habitual actions
Both sentences below express, " I go to the library every afternoon."

mitin xiw w q tshgun.
w mitin xiw q tshgun.

Intentional actions
I am going to the store tomorrow afternoon. (sentences 1, 2)
He is going to come to Beijing tomorrow morning. (sentences 3, 4)

1. mngtin xiw w q shngdin.
2. w mngtin xiw q shngdin.
3. mngtin zoshang t li Bijng.
4. t mngtin zoshang li Bijng.

In the example (xinzi) below, means "now". However, based on the context of
the question, the sentence still refers to an action that is intentional.

Question: (as someone prepares to walk out the door) Where are you going (now)?

Answer: I am going to the library.

w xinzi q tshgun.

Page 69 of 265

Negative Statements
In habitual or intentional action sentences (b) is always before the verb to make a
negative statement. In the examples below, (w) is the subject. As in the examples
above, context is needed to determine the speaker's meaning.

Habitual Actions
Question: Do you drink coffee?
Answer: I don't drink coffee. w b h kfi.

Intentional Actions
Question: Will you go to the library tomorrow?

Answer: I will not go to the library.

w b q tshgun.

Negative Statements - with Time Phrases
In both sentences below, (w) is the subject and the sentences express, "I am not
going to the store on Friday" or "I do not go to the library on Fridays"; depending on
context.

xngqw xiw w b q shngdin.

w xngqw xiw b q shngdin.

Questions
questions
As in the above examples, context is needed to determine the exact meaning of the
question.

Habitual Actions
"I notice you leave the cafeteria at one o'clock everyday. Do you go to the library?"

n q tshgun ma Do you go to the library?

Intentional Actions
"Mark told me you are going to school tomorrow. Are you going to the library?"

n q tshgun ma Are you going to the library?

questions with time phrases:
In the questions below, the time phrases may go at the beginning of the sentence or
after the subject. In the sentences below, (n) is the subject.
Page 70 of 265

1. Are you going to the store tomorrow?
2. Are you going to Shanghai on Friday?
3. Are you going to the store at 9 oclock?

1. n mngtin q shngdin ma
2. xngqw n q Shnghi ma
3. n ji dinzhng q shngdin ma

1. Where are you going?
2. What store are you going to?
3. What do you study?
4. Who is going to the store?
5. Where are you going?
6. What are you doing?
7. What are you doing?
8. What do you do on Fridays?
9. What are you going to do this afternoon?
10. What time are you going to the store?

1. n q shnme dfang
2. n q shnme shngdin
3. n xux shnme
4. shi q shngdin
5. n q nr
6. n gn shnme
7. n zu shnme
8. n xngqw gn shnme
9. n xiw zu shnme
10. n jdin q shngdin

'question word' questions with time phrases
In the questions below, the subject (n) could go at the beginning of the questions
or after the time phrases.

1. Where do you go every afternoon?
2. Where are you going tomorrow?
Page 71 of 265

3. What store are you going to on Friday?
4.

What are you going to do tomorrow
afternoon?
5. When do you drink coffee?
6. When are you going to Shanghai?
7. What time are you going to the store?

1.
n mitin xiw q nr
2.
mngtin n q shnme dfng
3.
n xngqw q shnme shngdin
4.
mngtin xiw n gn shnme
5.
n shnme shhou h kfi
6.
n shnme shhou q Shnghi
7.
n jdinzhng q shngdin

In this example, as in the above examples, context is needed to determine the exact
meaning of the question.

Do you go to the store?
Are you going to the store?
n q bu q shngdin Will you go to the store?
'affirmative - negative' questions that use two character verbs
There are two ways to express 'affirmative-negative' questions that have two-character
verbs. In the first sentence below, both characters of the verb, (xu x), are
repeated. In the second sentence, only the first character is repeated. Both sentences
have the same meaning, Do you study Chinese?

1. n xux bu xux zhngwn
2. n xu bu xux zhngwn

'affirmative - negative' questions with time phrases
1. Are you going to the store tomorrow?
2. Are you going to study Chinese next year?

1.
n mngtin q bu q shngdin
2.
mngnin n xu bu xux zhngwn
'or' questions
Do you study Chinese or English?
n xux hny hishi xux yngy?
Page 72 of 265

Unit 11
'Action Verb' Sentences - Actions in Progress
This unit introduces how to express actions that are in progress.

New Words
1. i rn husband or wife
2. c wipe
3. chng g to sing
4. d din hu a phone call
5. d ln qi play basketball
6. de sh hou when something happens
7. dng wait
8. din yng movie
9. dng xi things
10. gi to give
11. gng zu a job, to work
12. hi bn blackboard
13. hu will
14. ji home (a place), family (people)
15. ki hu start a meeting, have a meeting
16 l inside
17. lio tinr chit chat
18. mi buy
19. mi dng xi go shopping
20. ne a particle that indicates an action in progress
21. shn t health, body
22. shu jio sleep
23. to ln discuss
24. x wash
25. xi write
26. xi xi rest, break, a day off
27. yq together
28. yn wi because
29. zi an adverb that indicates an action in progress
30. zho to look for
31. zhng zi an adverb that indicates an action in progress
Page 73 of 265

32. zhr here
33. zu jn recently

In order to show that an action is in progress, place one of the adverbs (zi),
(zhng) or (zhng zi) before the predicate verb or place (ne) at the end of the
sentence. (zi), (zhng) and (zhng zi) are often used together with
(ne) to express that an action is in progress.

The sentences below show 7 possible ways to say: Mother is doing the laundry.

subject
/ /

predicate
verb
object
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

mm x yfu ne

Mother action in
progress
wash clothes action in
progress

Some verbs do not require objects. For instance, in the examples below the word for
rest [ (xi x)] does not need an object. The sentences below show 7 possible
ways to say: He is resting.

subject
/ /

predicate
verb

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

t xi x ne

He action in
progress
rest action in
progress

Page 74 of 265

If the speaker wants to indicate a place that an action (in progress) is occurring then
(zi) is followed by a place and is used as the preposition at. (Unit 14). In this
case, (zhng) and (ne) are used to indicate the action is in progress. The
sentences below mean, Mother is washing clothes at home.

mm zhng zi ji l x yfu
mm zhng zi ji l x yfu ne
mm zi ji l x yfu ne

Actions in progress with time phrases
Without more context or time words, it assumed that the actions in the above
sentences are occurring at the present time. However, actions in progress may occur in
the future or in the past. In sentence 2, is used as an auxiliary verb. This is covered
in greater detail in Unit 25.

1a.

1b.

2.

1a. zutin ji din zhng w zi kn dinsh
1b. w zutin ji din zhng zi kn dinsh
2. mngtin judin w hu zi kn dinyng

1a / 1b Yesterday at 9 oclock I was watching TV.
2. Tomorrow at 9 oclock I will be watching a movie.

(xin zi) which means now may also be used with, or in the same
way as time phrases as in : (w xinzi zi dng n) (I am waiting
for you now.)

These sentences may also have phrases that contain other elements. In the sentence
below, since (zi) does not come before a place, we know it indicates an action in
progress. This sentence means, They are shopping (together).

tmen zi yq mi dngxi ne

Negative Statements
To state that an action is not in progress, (mi) or (mi yu) are placed before
(zi). However, in spoken Chinese, it is not common to hear people use (mi
yu) before (zi). (zhng) and (ne) are not used in negative sentences.
Page 75 of 265

1.

w mi zi kn dinsh.
2.

t mi zi h kfi.

1.
I am not watching television.
2.
He is not drinking coffee.
Questions
To ask if an action is in progress, add (ma) to the end of the sentence. To answer
affirmatively, (sh) or (du) are used. Answering questions negatively only
requires that the speaker say (mi yu). When answering questions in full
sentences, (zi) is often omitted as in example sentences 1d and 2d below.

1. Question
1a. Affirmative answer or
1b. Negative answer
1c. Negative answer
1d. Negative answer ( omitted)
2. Question
2a. Affirmative answer or
2b. Negative answer
2c. Negative answer
2d. Negative answer ( omitted)

1. t men zi kn dinsh ma
1a. sh / du
1b. mi yu
1c. tmen mi zi kn dinsh
1d. tmen mi kn dinsh
2. n men zi toln ma
2a. sh / du
2b. mi yu
2c. w men mi zi tolnw men liotinr ne
2d. w men mi tolnw men liotinr ne

1. Are they watching TV?
1a. Yes
1b. No.
1c / 1d They are not watching TV.
2. Are you discussing? (something important)
2a. Yes
Page 76 of 265

2b. No
2c / 2d We are not in the middle of a serious discussion,
we are (only) chit chatting.

1.

shi zhngzi h kfi ma?
2.

t zhngzi h shnme?

1.
Who is drinking coffee? (now)
2.
What is he drinking? (now)

To ask what action is in progress, (zu shn me) or (gn shn me) may
be used. Example sentences 1-4 below have the same meaning: What are they
doing?

1. t men zi gn shnme
2. t men zhng zi zu shnme
3. t men zi zu shnme ne
4. t men zhng zi gn shnme ne

In some questions a verb is used with (shn me). Example sentences 1-4 below
have the same meaning: What is she writing?.

1. t zi xi shnme
2. t zhng zi xi shnme
3. t zi xi shn me ne
4. t zhng zi xi shnme ne

In the answers below, (xi sh) or (xi y bn sh) could be used to
say She is writing a book.

1.
t zi xi sh
2.
t zhng zi xi y bn sh
3.
t zi xi sh ne
4.
t zhng zi xi y bn sh ne

Example Sentences
1. They are having a meeting.
2. He is waiting on his wife.
3. He is resting.
Page 77 of 265

4. She is talking on the phone to a friend.
5. They are playing basketball.

1. tmen zi kihu
2. t zhng zi dng t de i rn ne
3. t zhng xixi
4. t zhng zi gi pngyou d dinhu ne
5. t men zi d lnqi

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

6. She is erasing the blackboard.
7. She is sleeping.
8. Because he is sick, he has been at home resting for last few days.
9. She is singing.
10. Recently, he has been looking for a job.

6.
t zhng zi c hibn ne
7.
t shu jio ne
8.
yn wi t shnt b hozh j tin t zhng zi ji l xixi
9.
t zhng zi chng g ne
10.
t zujn zi zho gngzu ne
Page 78 of 265

Unit 12
'Action Verb' Sentences
Completed Actions ()
Actions (as part of past experience) ()
This unit introduces how to express actions that have been completed as well as how
to express actions that occurred as part of an experience in the past.

New Words
1.

b y
granduate
2.

ch
to eat
3.

cng
from (a place)
4.

d xu
university
5.

Guln
a province of China
6.

gu
particle for indicating past
experience
7.

ji
measure word for shops and stores
8.

ji
borrow
9.

ji
then
10.

le
particle for indicating completed
action
11.

mo y
sweater
12.

s sh
dormitory
13.

xi k
to end a class
14.

y hu
after
15.

y qin
before
16.

yu y shng din
Friendship Store
17.

zo fn
breakfast
18.

zu
walk, to leave a place
19.

zh
live

Completed Actions ()
Note: (le) has many complex grammatical functions. This unit explains some of them, but does
not cover every way (le) can be used. For this reason, some of the explanations below will state
that it is always correct to use (le) in the way shown. For a complete explanation of (y
qin) (before) and (y hu) (after), refer to Unit 27.

When the verb is followed directly by the object (there is no pronoun, attributive, or
numeral-measure word following the verb) then (le) may be placed at the end of the
sentence or after the verb to indicate the action of the verb has been completed.
Page 79 of 265

1. 1a. I borrowed a dictionary.
2. 2a. I saw a movie.
3. 3a. I went to the store.

1. w ji cdin le. 1a. w ji le cdin.
2. w kn dinyng le. 2a. w kn le dinyng.
3. w q shngdin le. 3a. w q le shngdin.

To indicate a completed action, when there is a pronoun, attributive or number
between the verb and the object, then it is always correct to place (le) directly after
the verb.

4.

I borrowed his dictionary. (pronoun)
5.

I saw a Chinese movie. (attributive)
6.

I went to two stores. (number)

4. w ji le tde cdin.
5. w kn le zhnggu dinyng.
6. w q le ling ji shngdin.

Using (le) to indicate a specific action has been completed:
In these examples, the aspect particle is put after the verb to emphasize that an
action is completed. (Questions are explained at the end of this unit.)

1. Question 1:

What did you buy?
Answer 1:

I bought a sweater.
2. Question 2:

Have you read todays
newspaper?
Answer 2:

I read (the newspaper)

1. Question 1: n mi le shn me dngxi
Answer 1: w mi le y jin moy
2. Question 2: n kn le jntin de bozh mi yu
Answer 2: w kn le

Using (le) to indicate a situation has already occurred:
In these examples, the modal particle is put at the end of a sentence to emphasis
that a situation has already occurred.
Page 80 of 265

1. Where did you go yesterday?
2. I went to the Friendship store.

1. zutin n q nr le
2. w q yuy shngdin le

The difference between (le) when used to indicate specific actions have
occurred and when (le) is used to indicate that situations have occurred.
In example sentence 1 below, (le) is used after the verb to indicate the completion
of the specific action of having class. Without further context, it is not certain that the
class has taken place already. This sentence could refer to a future action, because the
action is sure to be completed, or a habitual action. In example sentence 2 below, we
know that the class has taken place (the situation has already occurred) because the
sentence ends with . It is clear that the person has already gone home.

1.

2.

1. t xi le k ji hu ji
2. t xi le k ji hu ji le

1. After class he goes home. / After class he will go home.
2. He went home after class.

Questions are covered later on in this unit; however, to further illustrate the difference
between a specific action and a situation, consider the difference between the
questions (1) (t q le nr ?) and (2) (t q nr le?)

Suppose a young couple and their son were walking through a mall doing some
shopping. Suddenly, one of the parents notices their son is missing. One parent says,
(t q le nr ?) (Where did he GO?) , the sentence refers to the specific
action of going.

Suppose the mother and the son had gone into one store and the father had gone into a
different store. The father was suppose to meet his wife and son at an appointed time.
The father fails to show up. The mother and son start to look for the father in places
they think he may have gone to. The mother would say (t q nr le?)
(Where could he have gone?). Perhaps after they meet again, the mother would say
(n q nr le?) (Where did you go?) In this case, the sentence refers to the
overall situation, not specifically the action of the verb going.
Page 81 of 265

Completed actions with time phrases:
Time phrases are always placed at the beginning of sentences or immediately
following the subject. In the examples below, (w) is the subject. Since there is no
pronoun, attributive or number between the verb and the object, it is always correct to
place (le) at the end of the sentence or after the verb.

1.

I borrowed a dictionary on Friday.
2.

I borrowed a dictionary on Friday.
3.

I saw a movie on Friday.
4.

I saw a movie on Friday.
5.

I went to the store on Friday.
6.

I went to the store on Friday.

1. w xngqw ji cdin le.
2. xngqw w ji le cdin.
3. w xngqw kn dinyng le.
4. xngqw w kn le dinyng.
5. w xngqw q shngdin le.
6. xngqw w q le shngdin.

Since there is a pronoun, attributive or number between the verb and the object, then
it is always correct to place (le) directly after the verb.

(pronoun)
1. I borrowed his dictionary on Friday.
(attributive)
2. I saw a Chinese movie on Friday.
(number)
3. I went to two stores on Friday.

1. w xngqw ji le tde cdin.
2. xngqw w kn le zhnggu dinyng.
3. w xngqw q le ling ji shngdin.

Note: Using the particle (le) is not the same as using past tense in English, it
indicates an actions completion, which may occur in a future time frame.

mngtin ch le zofn yhu wmen j
zu
Tomorrwo eat (completion) breakfast after we then go.

Page 82 of 265

Negative Statements
To express an action that has not occured, (le) is not used, (mi) or (mi
yu) are placed directly before the verb and (le) is omitted. In these type sentences
(b) may not be used.

1.

1a.
I did not borrow a

dictionary.
2. 2a. I did not see a movie.
3. 3a. I did not go to the store.

1. w mi ji cdin. 1a. w miyu ji cdin.
2. w mi kn dinyng. 2a. w miyu kn dinyng.
3. w mi q shngdin. 3a. w miyu q shngdin.

No numeral-measure word examples are given below since it would be uncommon to
express an idea such as "I did not go to two stores." This thought would be expressed
in an affirmative way, for example, "I only went to one store."

4.
()
I did not borrow his dictionary. (pronoun)
5.
()
I did not see a Chinese movie. (attributive)

4. w mi ji tde cdin.
5. w mi kn zhngwn dinyng.

negative statements with time phrases
1.

I didn't go to the store on Friday.
2.

I didn't go to the store on Friday.

1. xngqw w mi q shngdin.
2. w xngqw mi q shngdin.

Questions
questions
Since the verb is not followed by a pronoun, attributive or number; (le) may placed
directly after the verb or just before (ma).

1.? 1a.? Did you borrowed a dictionary?
2.? 2a.? Did you see a movie?
3.? 3a.? Did you go to the store?

Page 83 of 265

1. n ji cdin le ma? 1a. n ji le cdin ma?
2. n kn dinyng le ma? 2a. n kn le dinyng ma?
3. n q shngdin le ma? 3a. n q le shngdin ma?

Since there is a pronoun, attributive or number between the verb and the object, then
it is always correct to place (le) directly after the verb.

1.

Did you borrow his
dictionary?
(pronoun)
2.

Did you see a Chinese
movie?
(attributive)
3.

Did you go to those two
stores?
(number)

1.
n ji le tde cdin ma
2.
n kn le zhngwn dinyng ma
3.
n q le n ling ji shngdin ma

questions with time phrases
Time phrases are always placed at the beginning of sentences or immediately
following the subject. In the examples below, (n) is the subject.

1.

Did you go to the store yesterday?
2.

3.

Did you see a Chinese movie yesterday?
4.

Did you see a Chinese movie yesterday?
1.
zutin n q shngdin le ma
2.
n zutin q le shngdin ma
3.
n zutin kn le zhngwn dinyng ma
4.
zutin n kn le zhngwn dinyng ma

(mi yu) questions
Adding (mi yu) to the end of a statement creates a yes-no question.

1.
?
Did you borrow a dictionary?
2.
?
Did you borrow a dictionary?
3.

Did you borrow his dictionary?

1. n ji cdin le mi yu?
2. n ji le cdin mi yu?
Page 84 of 265

3.
n ji le tde cdin mi yu

(mi yu) questions with time phrases
1.

2.

3.

Did you see a Chinese movie
yesterday?
4.

Did you see a Chinese movie
yesterday?

1.
zutin n q shngdin le miyu
2.
n zutin q le shngdin miyu
3.
n zutin kn le zhngwn dinyng miyu
4.
zutin n kn le zhngwn dinyng miyu

1.

What did you do yesterday
afternoon?
2.

What movie did you watch
yesterday afternoon?
3.

What movie did you watch
yesterday afternoon?
1.
zutin xiw n gn shnme le
2.
zutin xiw n kn shnme dinyng le
3.
zutin xiw n kn le shnme dinyng

Questioning the time an action was completed
When questioning the time an action occurred, use the same word order as statements
that express time; except (time) question words are used in place of the time.

1.

When did you go to Shanghai?
2.

3.

What time did you go to the store?
4.

What time did you go to the store?
5.

What time did you go to the store
yesterday?
6.

What time did you go to the store
yesterday?

1.
n shnmeshhu q le Shnghi
2.
n shnmeshhu q Shnghi le
3.
n jdinzhng q le shngdin
Page 85 of 265

4.
n jdinzhng q shngdin le
5.
n zutin jdinzhng q le shngdin
6.
n zutin jdinzhng q shngdin le

1.

Did he go to Shanghai?
2.

Did he go to Shanghai on Friday?
3.

Did you watch a movie on Friday?

1.
t q mi q Shnghi
2.
xngqw t q mi q Shnghi
3.
xngqw n kn mi kn dinyng

When (le) isnt used when expressing completed actions
It is not always necessary to use (le) to indicate a actions have been completed. For
example, if a past action is a habitual one (example 1), when it there is no need to
emphasize the completion of an action (examples 2 and 3) nor is it used in describing
the circumstances in which something took place (example 4).

1.

2.

3.
2005
4.

1. y qin t chng chng li kn w
2. q nin t zi xushng ssh zh
3. Lmng 2005 nin dxu by
4. w q kn t deshhout zi ji xixi ne

1.
In the past, he often visited me.
2.
Last year, he lived in the student dormitory.
3.
Li Ming graduated from university in 2005.
4.
When I went to see him, he was at home resting.

Page 86 of 265

Action Verbs
Actions (as part of past experience) ()
(gu) goes directly after the verb and indicates that an action or experience took
place in the past, but does not emphasize the completion of a specific action.

1. I have been to Shanghai.
2. I have seen this movie.

1. w q gu Shnghi.
2. w kn gu zh g dinyng.

Past Actions with time phrases
To illustrate the difference between (le) and (gu) consider the following. In the
first sentence, (gu) is used to express the action (go) took place as part of a past
action.

I went to Shanghai this year. (However, I am back now.)

w jnnin q gu Shnghi.

When (le) is used, it expresses that the specific action (go) was completed.

He went to Shanghai this year. (He is still there.)

t jnnin q le Shnghi.

Negative Statements
To express that an action has not occurred in the past, (gu) is used with either
(mi) or (mi yu). (mi) or (mi yu) are placed before the verb and
(gu) is place directly after the verb.

1. I have not been to Shanghai.
2. I have not been to Shanghai.

1. w mi q gu Shnghi.
2. w miyu q gu Shnghi.

Questions
(gu) is most commonly used to express Have you ever questions.

Have you (ever) eaten Chinese dumplings?
Page 87 of 265

n ch gu jiozi ma

When more specific information is asked for, a (le) sentence is used.


shnme shhu n q Shnghi le

questions
Have you (ever) been to Shanghai?

n q gu Shnghi ma?

questions
When using (gu), (mi yu) may be added to the end of a statement to create
a question.


n q gu Shnghi miyu?

1. Where have you been?
2. What place(s) have you been to?
3. What have you studied?
4. Who has been to Shanghai?

1.
n q gu nr
2.
n q gu shnme dfang
3.
n xux gu shnme
4.
shi q gu Shnghi


n q mi q gu Shnghi

Page 88 of 265

Describing a situation
(shde)
The (shde) pattern is used to characterize a situation or to clarify an
assumption. For instance, both of the sentences below mean: He came to China
yesterday. The difference in usage is that sentence 2 addresses the situation:

Sentence 1 would be used to answer the question: When did he arrive?
Sentence 2 would be used to answer the question: Why cant he speak Chinese?

1. t zutin li zhnggu le
2. t sh zutin li zhnggu de

If a person had an unfamiliar accent, the question (3) and answer (4) below could be
used:

3. n sh cng nr li de
4. w sh cng Guln li de

Anytime this pattern is used with action, it always refers to some action that has
already occurred. The sentence below, must refer to a past event. Sentence 5 below
means, When did you arrive in Beijing?

5.

n sh shnme shhu do Bijng
de

This sentence pattern is also used to ask about jobs. The sentence below means,
What is your job?

6.
n sh zu shnme gng zu de

Page 89 of 265

Unit 13
Using (le) to indicate a change of state

New Words
1. ch chi* travel on business
2. f sho to have a fever
3. fn meal
4. hu li** come back
5. mi sell
6. mi wn sell out of something
7. pio ticket
8. xi y to rain

* To express traveling for pleasure, (l xng) or (l yu) are used.
** (hu li) is a compound compliment of direction. For a detailed explanation
of compound compliments refer to Unit 30.

In the examples below, (le) is used to indicate the state of affairs has changed. This
usage is much more common in the spoken language than in the written form because
the change of state is relative to the current situation of the speaker and listener. For
instance, a person may look out the window and notice that it has started to rain and
say, " (xi y le)", "it is raining" (it wasn't before). At dinner time you will
hear, "(fn ho le!)", "dinner is ready!". The context of these sentences is
very important. When using (le) to indicate a change of state, it indicates that (1)
the state has actually changed, (2) it has changed relative to what a person thought it
was or (3) that someone has made a new discovery.

If a mother has taken her sons temperature and announces that he has a fever, (le)
would be used to indicate the change of state.

t f sho le He has a fever.

Suppose a childs parents were under the impression that their son was in his room
doing his homework, and one of the parents realized that he was sleeping.

t shu jio le He is sleeping.

Suppose two people usually play tennis on Monday afternoon but, unexpectedly, one
of them has to go out of town on business. In this case, (le) would added to the end
of the sentence to indicate the situation has changed, relative to what the listener had
thought.
Page 90 of 265

I will be going out town on business this next
Monday.

xi g xngqy w ji ch chi le

If the person who didnt leave town ran into the traveling person on the following
Wednesday, but didnt think the business trip would be so short, (le) would be used
to indicate surprise at seeing the traveling person.

! n hu li le Youre back!.

If someone were describing their classmate to a friend, they may say, He is tall
(sentence 1). If a relative had not seen a child for a long time and the child had gotten
taller since their relatives had seen them, they would say He has gotten taller.
(sentence 2)

1. t hn go He is tall.
2. t go le He has gotten taller.

If a person entered a room with a pot of tea and someone did not intend to drink tea,
they would use the first sentence. If, after drinking some tea, they were offered a refill
but didnt want to drink anymore tea, they could use the second sentence.

1. w b h I am not having any tea.
2. w b h le I am not having any more tea.

When is used to indicate a change of state and a completed action:
Sometimes, (le) indicates both a completed action and a change of state. The
occurrence of the tickets selling out has occurred and the state of the situation has
changed, there are now no tickets and there were before.

Last Monday the tickets all sold out.

shng g xngq pio du mi wn le

In the example above, (mi wn) is a verb that is followed by a compliment of
completion. (mi) is a verb, which means to sell. (mi) is immediately
followed (wn), which is used as a verb compliment of results to indicate the
action of the verb has reached a state of completion. (Refer to Unit 22 for a full
explanation of (verb compliments of results.)
Page 91 of 265

Unit 14
'To Be' at a Place
This unit introduces how (zi) is used as a verb to express being at a location and
how it is used as the preposition at.

New Words
1.

sh din
bookstore
2.

zi
in, at

as a Verb
'To Be' at a place
When used as a verb, (zi) carries the to be meaning. Since there is a place
following (zi) and no action verb in the sentence, we know that (zi) means "to
be at" a location.

t zi tshgun.
He is at the library.

If there were an action verb in the sentence, for example, (kn) (to read) as in the
sentence (t zi tshgun kn bozh.) then (zi) would
be the preposition at, which is explained in the next section of this unit.

Negative Statements
When (zi) carries the meaning to be, the rules for placing (mi) or (b)
are the same as action verbs.

t b zi tshgun.
He is not at the library.

t mi zi tshgun.
He was not at the library.

If context allows, the place may be omitted, as in the answer below.

t zi tshgun ma
Is he at the library?

t b zi.
He is not.

If a completed action is being discussed, then (mi) is used in the answer:

1. Were you at the library yesterday?
2. I was not.

1.
zutin n zi tshgun ma
2. w mi zi.

Page 92 of 265

Questions
questions
t zi tshgun ma Is he at the library?

shi zi tshgun
Who is at the library?
t zi nr
Where is he?

t zi bu zi tshgun
Is he at the
library?

'or' questions

Is he at the library or the bookstore?

t zi tshgun hishi zi shdin

(zi) as the preposition "at"

Habitual or Intentional Actions
When expressing the location where an action happens, functions as the
preposition "at". In the example below, there is an action verb in the sentence, so
(zi tshgun) is a prepositional phrase meaning "at the library". The
prepositional phrase, place (ziplace), must go after the subject.

He is at the library reading a newspaper.
He reads newspapers at the library.

t zi tshgun kn bozh.

When " place " (ziplace) prepositional phrases are used in action verb
sentences that have time phrases, they may directly follow the subject or the time
words. They may not be placed after the action verbs or at the beginning of the
sentences. Both sentences below mean, I watch TV at home on Thursdays.

1. w xngqs zi ji kn dinsh.
2. xngqs w zi ji kn dinsh.

Page 93 of 265

Actions in Progress
In the sentence, (w zhngzi kn dinsh.) ("I am watching TV"), we
know that (zhngzi) is used to indicate that action is in progress because it
comes before a verb. If (zi) comes before a place then "place" (ziplace) is
a prepositional phrase and (zhng) is used to indicate the action of the verb (
(kn) is in progress. In the examples below, (zi ji) and (zi
tshgun) are prepositional phrases that indicate the locations of the actions and
(zhng) tells us that the action is in progress.

1. I am at home watching television.
2. He is at the at the library reading.

1. w zhng zi ji kn dinsh.
2. t zhng zi tshgun knsh.

Completed actions
In action verb sentences, the prepositional phrase, place (ziplace), must go
after the subject. The following example means, "I borrowed a book at the library."

w zi tshgun ji le sh.

When " place" (ziplace) prepositional phrases are used in action verb
sentences that have time phrases, the prepositional phrase may directly follow the
subject or the time phrase. It may not be after the action verb or at the beginning or
the sentence. The following examples mean, "I borrowed two books at the library on
Saturday."

1.

2.

1. w xngqli zi tshgun ji le ling bn sh.
2. xngqli w zi tshgun ji le ling bn sh.

Negative Statements
To make a negative statement, (b) or (mi) is placed before the prepositional
phrase beginning with (zi).

1.

I don't work in Beijing.
2.

I don't watch TV at home on Thursdays.
3.

I didnt watch TV at home yesterday, I
watched TV at my friends home.

Page 94 of 265

1. w b zi Bijng gngzu.
2. xngqs w b zi ji kn dinsh.
3.
w zutin mi zi ji kn dinshw zi
pngyou ji kn dinsh
Questions
questions
1.
Is he at the library reading?
Does he read at the library?

2.
Is he at the library reading (now)?
3.
What did you do at school yesterday?

1.
t zi tshgun knsh ma
2.
t zhngzi tshgun knsh ma
3.
n zutin zi xuxio gn shnme le

1.
Who reads at the library?
2.
Where does he read?
3.
? Where do you read?
4.
Where is he reading (now)?
5.
Where is he reading (now)?

1.
shi zi tshgun kn sh
2.
t zi nr kn sh
3.
n zi shnme dfang knsh
4.
t zhngzi nr knsh
5.
t zhngzi shnme dfang knsh

1.

Is he at the library?
2.

Do you watch TV at home on
Thursdays?
3.

Did you watch TV at home
yesterday?

1.
t zi bu zi tshgun
2.
xngqs n zi bu zi ji kn dinsh
3.
n zutin zi mi zi ji kn dinsh
Page 95 of 265

Unit 15
There is (there exists) (, , )
This unit introduces how to express locations. Relative locations are introduced as
well as some place names.

New Words
1.

b
measure word for chair
2.

bi bin
north side
3.

bi min
north side
4.

bin
side
5.

cn gun
restaurant
6.

dng bin
east side
7.

dng min
east side
8.

du min
opposite
9.

lu s
Russia
10.

hu bin
behind
11.

hu min
behind
12.

jin zh
building (noun)
13.

k zhu
school desk for students
14.

min
side, surface
15.

nn bin
south side
16.

nn min
south side
17.

png bin
beside
18.

qin bin
front side
19.

qin min
front side
20.

x bin
west side
21.

x min
west side
22.

xu yun
campus
23.

y yun
hospital
24.

y zi
chair
25.

yu bin
right side
26.

yu min
right side
27.

yu j
post office
28.

zi
at, there exists, there is
29.

zhng
measure word for table
30.

zhng jin
middle, between
Page 96 of 265

31.

zu bin
left side
32.

zu min
left side

Additional Phrases

zhuzi de zubin
left side of the desk

zhuzi de yu bin
right side of the desk

tshgun de pngbin
next to the library

yyun de bi bin
north of the library

xuxio de dumin
opposite the school

There is (there exists) (, , )
English sentences that begin with 'there is', meaning 'there exists', are expressed using
(yu)(zi), and (sh).

(person or thing) () (location)

(location) ( / ) (person or thing)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.
2.
3.
There is a chair behind the desk.
4.
That chair is on the left side of the desk.
5.
There is a chair in front of your desk.
6.
Your chair is on the left side of the desk.
7.
Russia is north of China.

1. yz zi zhuzi de zubin.
2. zhuzi de zubin yu y b yzi.
3. zhuzi de hubin sh y b yzi.
4. n b yz zi zhuzi de zubin.
5. nde zhuzi de qin bin yu y b yzi.
6. zhuzi de zubin sh nde yzi.
Page 97 of 265

7. zhnggu de bibin sh lus.

Beside
English sentences that say one thing or person is next to another thing or person use
the following pattern.

(person or thing) () (person's or thing's side)

(person's or thing's side) ( / ) (person or thing)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.
There is a dormitory beside the library.
2.
3.
4.
That dormitory is beside the library.
5.
There is a dormitory beside our school's library.
6.
My dormitory is beside the library.

1. ssh zi tshgun de pngbin.
2. tshgun de pngbin yu y g ssh.
3. tshgun de pngbin sh y g ssh.
4. n g ssh zi tshgun de pngbin.
5. wmen xuxio tshgun de pngbin yu y g
ssh.
6. tshgun de pngbin sh wde ssh.

Usage note for (yu) and (sh): If there are several people or things at a place
and the one you are talking about is one of many, (yu) is used. If there is only one
thing at a place, then (sh) is used. For instance, If there were several people
standing beside a car and the speaker wanted to say, My teachers is beside that car.
then then (yu) is used. (ch pngbin yu wde losh)
If there was only one person standing by the car, (sh) would be used.
(ch pngbin sh wde losh)
Page 98 of 265

Opposite ()
is optional in the following sentence pattern.

(opposite a thing or person) ( / ) (thing or person)

1.
( / )
2.
( / )
3.
( / )
4.
( / )

1.
There is a dormitory opposite the library.
2.
There is a dormitory opposite the library.
3.
There is a school opposite my home.
4.
There is a school opposite my home.

1. tshgun de dumin (yu / sh) y g ssh.
2. zi tshgun de dumin (yu / sh) y g ssh.
3. w ji de dumin (yu / sh) y su xuxio.
4. zi w ji de dumin (yu / sh) y su xuxio.

Between
Both example A and B mean: There is a dormitory between the library and the
cafeteria.

Example A:
(person or
thing)
(person or
thing)
(person or
thing)

ssh zi tshgun h cngun zhngjin

Example B:
(person or
thing)
(person or
thing)
(person or
thing)

zi tshgun h cngun zhngjin sh y ge ssh

1.

2.

Page 99 of 265

1. My dormitory is between the library and the cafeteria.
2. My dormitory is between the library and the cafeteria.

1.
zi tshgun h cngun zhngjin sh y g ssh .
2.
n g ssh zi tshgun h cngun zhngjin.

Negative Statements
To make negative statements, (mi yu), (b zi), and (b sh) are
used. In these cases, stating that something "is not" in a place, measure words are not
used. *When expressing that 'nothing' exists in a specific place, (b sh) is not
used, (mi yu) is used (sentence 8).

There is not



1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

*8.

1.
There is not a chair on the left side of the desk.
2.
There is not a chair on the left side of the desk.
3.
There is not a chair behind the desk.
4.
That chair is not on the left side of the desk.
5.
There is not a chair in front of your desk.
6.
Your chair is not on the left side of the desk.
7.
China is not north of Russia.
*8.
There is nothing on the left side of the desk.

1. yzi bzi zhuzi de zubin.
2. zhuzi de zubin miyu yzi.
3. zhuzi de zubin b sh yzi.
4. n b yzi bzi zhuzi de zubin.
5. nde zhuzi de qinbin miyu yzi.
Page 100 of 265

6. zhuzi de zubin bsh nde yzi.
7. zhnggu bzi lus de bi bin.
*8. zhuzi de zubin miyu dngxi.

Is not beside
English sentences that say one thing or person is not next to another thing or person
use the following pattern. *When expressing that 'nothing' exists in a specific place,
(b sh) is not used, (mi yu) is used (sentence 7).



1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

*7.

1.
There is not a dormitory beside the library.
2.
3.
4.
That dormitory is not beside the library.
5.
There is not a dormitory beside our school's library.
6.
My dormitory is not beside the library.
7.
There is nothing (no building) beside the library.

1. ssh bzi tshgun de pngbin.
2. tshgun de pngbin miyu ssh.
3. tshgun de pngbin bsh ssh.
4. n ge ssh bzi tshgun de pngbin.
5. wmen xuxio tshgun de pngbin miyu ssh.
6. tshgun de pngbin bsh wde ssh.
7. tshgun de pngbin miyu jinzh.

Is not opposite
English sentences that say one thing or person is not opposite another thing or person
use the following pattern. *When expressing that 'nothing' exists in a specific place,
(b sh) is not used, (mi yu) is used (sentence 5).
Page 101 of 265



1.
( / )
2.
( / )
3.
( / )
4.
( / )
*5.
.

1.
There is not a dormitory opposite the library.
2.
There is not a dormitory opposite the library.
3.
There is not a school opposite my home.
4.
There is not a school opposite my home.
*5.
There is nothing (no building) opposite my home.

1.
tshgun de dumin (miyu / bsh) ssh
2. zi tshgun de dumin (miyu / bsh) ssh.
3. w ji de dumin (miyu / bsh) xuxio.
4. zi w ji de dumin (miyu / bsh) xuxio.
*5. w ji de dumin miyu jinzh.

Is not between
(b zi) and (b sh) are used to express that something is "not" between
two other things. *In these sentence patterns, (miyu) is only used to express
"nothing" is between two things (sentence 5).

(person or thing) () (person or thing) () (person or thing) ()

() (person or thing) () (person or thing) () () (person or thing)

1.

2.

3.

4.

*5.

1.
There is not a dormitory between the library and the cafeteria.
2.
There is not a dormitory between the library and the cafeteria.
3.
My dormitory is not between the library and the cafeteria.
Page 102 of 265

4.
That dormitory is not between the library and the cafeteria.
*5.
There is nothing between the cafeteria and the library.

1. ssh bzi tshgun h cngun zhngjin.
2. zi tshgun h cngun zhngjin bsh ssh.
3. wde ssh bzi tshgun h cngun zhngjin.
4. n ge ssh bzi tshgun h cngun zhngjin.
*5. zi tshgun h cngun zhngjin miyu jinzh.

Questions
questions
1.

Is there a post office west of the school?
2.

Is the hospital opposite the post office?

1.
xuxio x bin sh yuj ma
2.
yyun zi yuj de dumin ma

affirmative-negative questions

Is there a post office west of the school?

xuxio x bin sh bu sh yuj

1.

Where is the library?
2.

What (place) is west of the school?
3.

What is beside the school?

1.
tshgun zi nr
2.
xuxio de x bin sh shnme dfang
3.
xuxio de pngbin yu shnme

Page 103 of 265

Unit 16
Over / On / Under / Below / In / Out
This unit introduces more ways to express locations.

New Words
1.

ch
vehicle (car, bike, bus)
2.

ch z q ch
taxi
3.

d mn
main gate
4.

d
ground
5.

fi j
airplane
6.

gng gng q ch
public bus
7.

hu ch
train
8.

l bin
in, inside
9.

l mian
in, inside
10.

lu fng
multi-story building
11.

l
road
12.

shng bin
top side
13.

shng min
top side
14.

sh bo
book bag, backpack
15.

sh ji
bookshelf
16.

wi bin
outside
17.

wi min
outside
18.

xi bin
under, below, bottom side
19.

xi min
under, below, bottom side
20.

y
page

Additional Phrases

zi l shang
on the street (walking)

zi ch shang
in a vehicle / on a bike

zi zxngch shang
on a bike

zi chzqch shang
in a taxi

zi huch shang
on a train

zi lu shang
upstairs

zi lu xi
downstairs

zi d shang
on the (ground / floor)

zi hibn shang
on the blackboard
88
zi bshb y shang
on page 88
Page 104 of 265

zi shbo l
in the book bag

zi shdin l
in the bookstore

zi dmn wi
outside the main gate

zi ssh wi
outside the dormitory

Over / On / Under / Below / In / Out
Depending on context, (shng) means on, over, or above and (xi) means under
or below. In the examples below, (bin) and (min) are optional because they
are implied by context.

Since (zi) is not followed by a verb we know that, in these examples, (zi)
means "to be at".

( person or thing ) ( ) ( location )

1.
(/)
2.
(/)
3.
(/)
4.
(/)
5.
(/)

1.
My book is on the desk.
2.
There is a bookshelf over/on the desk.
3.
There are/is book(s) under/below the desk.
4.
My dictionary is in the book bag.
5.
There is a teacher outside the classroom.

1. wde sh zi zhuzi shng (bin/min).
2. shji zi zhuzi shng (bin/min).
3. sh zi zhuzi xi (bin/min).
4. wde cdin zi sh bo l (bin/min).
5. losh zi jiosh wi (bin/min).

In these examples, (yu) is used to express 'there is', meaning 'there exists'.

( location ) () (person or thing)

1.
(/)
2.
(/)
3.
(/)
4.
(/)
Page 105 of 265

5.
(/)

1.
My book is on the desk.
2.
There is a bookshelf over/on the desk.
3.
There are/is book(s) under/below the desk.
4.
My dictionary is in the book bag.
5.
There is a teacher outside the classroom.

1. zhuzi shng (bin/min) yu wde sh.
2. zhuzi shng (bin/min) yu shji.
3. zhuzi xi (bin/min) yu sh.
4. bol (bin/min) yu wde cdin.
5. jiosh wi (bin/min) yu losh.

Negative Statements
The make a negative statement, (b) is placed before (zi).

( person or thing ) () ( location )

1.
(/)
2.
(/)
3.
(/)
4.
(/)
5.
(/)

1.
Your book is not on the desk.
2.
There is not a bookshelf over/on the desk.
3.
Your book is not under the desk.
4.
My dictionary is not in the book bag.
5.
The teacher is not outside the classroom.

1. nde sh bzi zhuzi shng (bin/min).
2. shji bzi zhuzi shng (bin/min).
3. nde sh bzi zhuzi xi (bin/min).
4. wde cdin bzi shbo l (bin/min).
5. losh bzi jiosh wi (bin/min).

Page 106 of 265

The make a negative statement, (mi) is placed before (yu).

( location ) () ( person or thing )

1.
(/)
2.
(/)
3.
(/)
4.
(/)
5.
(/)

1.
My book is not on the desk.
2.
There is not a bookshelf over/on the desk.
3.
Your book is not under the desk.
4.
My dictionary is not in the book bag.
5.
There is not a teacher outside the classroom.

1. zhuzi shng (bin/min) miyu wde sh.
2. zhuzi shng (bin/min) miyu shji.
3. zhuzi xi (bin/min) miyu nde sh.
4. bol (bin/min) miyu wde cdin.
5. jiosh wi (bin/min) miyu losh.

Questions
questions
1.
(/)
Is my book is on the desk?
2.
(/)

1. wde sh zi zhuzi shng (bin/min) ma?
2. zhuz shng (bin/min) yu wde sh ma?

'affirmative-negative' questions
1.
(/)
2.
(/)

1.
zhuzi shng (bin/min) yu mi yu wde sh
2.
wde sh zi bu zi zhuzi shng (bin/min)

Page 107 of 265

'questions word' questions
In the questions below, (dng xi) is optional.

1.
(/) ?
What is on the desk?
2.
(/)?
What is on the desk?

1. zhuzi shng (bin/min) yu shnme dngxi?
2. shnme dngxi zi zhuzi shng (bin/min)?

Page 108 of 265

Unit 17
Actions in a Continuing State ()
This unit discusses actions that have resulted in continuing states and actions that are
continuing.

New Words
1.

bi
to place things for the purpose
decorating
2.

bo
to carry (in ones arms)
3.

bi
to carry on ones back
4.

co
grass
5.

co d
the ground covered with grass
growing on it
6.

chun
to wear, to put on (clothing)
7.

chung
bed
8.

chung ti
window sill
9.

di
to take, to lead
10.

di
to wear (hat, glasses, tie)
11.

fng
to put something somewhere
12.

gu
to hang something up
13.

gun
close
14.

j zi
sentence
15.

ki
open, turn on
16.

lo lao
maternal grandmother
17.

mn
door, gate
18.

mn ku
door, gate
19.

nin
to read aloud
20.

pi zi
sign
21.

qing
wall
22.

qn zi
dress, skirt
25.

ti dng
table lamp
26.

tng
to lie down or recline
27.

ti
to stick something to another thing
28.

wi y
coat
29.

yn jng
glasses
30.

yye
paternal grandfather
31.

zhn
to stand
Page 109 of 265

32.

zho xing j
camera
33.

zhe
aspect particle indicating a
continuing state or action
34.

zu
to sit

The examples below show the difference between actions in progress and
continuing states. In sentence 1, (zi) indicates that an action is in progress, the
subject is actively doing something. In sentence 2, (zhe) indicates a state is
continuing. For example:

1.
t zi chun wiy
2.
t chun zhe wiy

1. He is putting on a coat.
2. He is wearing a coat.

Actions that have resulted in a continuing state (zhe)
Actions that are continuing (zhe)
To indicate that that an action is continuing or has resulted in a continuing state, the
particle (zhe) is placed directly after the verb with nothing in between. If the verb
takes an object, then the object must directly follow (zhe) with nothing in between.
The particle and adverbs and may not be used in these types of sentences.
In these examples, the action of the verb has resulted in the subject being in a
continuing state.

The door is open.

subject predicate verb

mn ki zhe
the door open continuing state

The dictionary has been put on the desk. (and is still there)


zhuzi shng fng zhe y bn cdin
On the desk put continuing state a dictionary

Page 110 of 265

In the examples below, the action of the verb is continuing.

The teacher is standing.

subject predicate verb

lo sh zhn zhe
teacher stand continuing action

Mother is carrying a child.


mm bo zhe hi zi
Mother carry continuing action child

Unless context or time words indicate otherwise, the action in these sentences is
generally assumed to be happening at the current time. Continuing actions also may
occur habitually, in the past or in the future; as in the examples below.

Habitual :
1.

The library door is opened at 7 am in
the morning.
2.

The library door is closed at 9 pm at
night.

1.
zo shang q din t sh gun de mn ki zhe
2.
wn shang ji din t sh gun de mn gun zhe

Past : I took a camera yesterday.

zutin w di zhe zhoxingj

Future : I will take a camera tomorrow.

mngtin w hu di zhe zho xing j

Negative Statements
To state that an action is not continuing, (mi) or (mi yu) are placed before
the predicate verb.

1.

Page 111 of 265

2.

1. xushng mi zhn zhetmen zu zhe
2. zutin w mi yu di zhe zhoxingj

1. The students are not standing, they are sitting.
2. Yesterday, I did not take a camera.

Questions
To ask a yes-no question about a continuing action or a continuing state in a sentence
that uses (zhe), (mi yu) or (ma) are placed at the end of the sentence. To
answer affirmatively, state the verb followed by (zhe ne). (mi yu)
questions may not be answered affirmatively using (du) or (sh). (ma)
questions may be answered affirmatively using (du) or (sh), however, (du)
or (sh) may not be used as one-word answers. They are generally followed by a
complete sentence.

Did you bring a Chinese dictionary?

n di zhe hny cdin mi yu

n di zhe hny cdin ma

negative answer

mi yu
negative answer
mi yuw mi di zhe
negative answer
mi di
affirmative answer
di zhe ne

The affirmative answers below are grammatically correct but they are too long to be
used in common conversation. The two examples below mean, Yes, I did bring a
camera.

, du, w di zhe hny cdin
, sh, w di zhe hny cdin

Example Sentences
1.
qing shng ti zhe dt
2.
mn ku ti zhe y g pizi
3.
qing shng gu zhe hu
4.
chung ti shng bi zhe hu
5.
chung ti shng fng zhe hu
Page 112 of 265

1. A map is taped to the wall.
2. A sign is glued on the door.
3. A picture is hanging on the wall.
4. Some flowers are (displayed) on the window sill.
5. Some flowers are lying on the window sill.

In the above sentences 1 3, the character (ti) is used to describe things that are
stuck to other things, for instance, when something is glued or taped to another
thing. To express hanging something, such as a picture or clock, (gu) is used. In
sentences 4 and 5) the character (bi) is means to be displayed and the character
(fng) means to put. If someone where to put a vase of flowers on a window sill
with the intention of decorating, they would use (bi). If someone had laid down a
bunch of flowers on the window sill, simply as a place to put them for the moment,
(fng) would be used.

6.
t chun zhe xn qnzi
7.
t di zhe ynjng
8.
t di zhe mozi
9.
chung h gun zhe
10.
ti dng ki zhe

6. She is wearing a new dress.
7. He is wearing glasses.
8. He is wearing a hat.
9. The window is closed.
10. The table lamp is on.

In the above sentences 7 and 8), when expressing to wear articles of clothing,
(chun) is used; however, (chun) is not used for everything one can wear. For
wearing some things, such as hats, glasses, and gloves; (di) is used. When
referring to items that are worn, but are tied, for example a necktie, (di) or (j)
may used.

11.
xushng men zu zhe
12.
yye shu zhe
13.
mn ki zhedinsh y ki zhe
14.
n g xushng bi zhe shbo
15.
t zu zhe q xuxio

11. The students are sitting.
12. Grandpa (paternal) is sleeping.
Page 113 of 265

13. The door is open, the TV is also on.
14. That student is carrying a book bag.
15. He is walking to school.

In sentence 14, (bi) is used to indicate someone is carrying something on their
back, such as a backpack. In China, a backpack is usually referred to as a bookbag
(sh bo).

16.
losh zu zhexixi
17.
lolao zi chung shng tng zhe
18.
lolao tng zhe mi yu
19.

t mi zi chung shng
tng zhe t zu zhe
20.
mn ki zhe mi yu

16. The teacher is sitting and resting.
17. Grandmother (maternal) is lying on the bed.
18. Is Grandmother (maternal) lying on the bed?
19. She isnt lying on the bed, she is sitting.
20. Is the door open?

21.

mm di zhe hizimen
q shngdin
22.

t di zhe wmen nin
hibn shng de jzi
23.
t zi humian zhn zhe
24.

dt zi qing shng
gu zhe
25.

tmen du zi cod
shng zu zhe

21. Mother is taking the children to the store.
22. The teacher led us while we spoke the sentence on the board.
23. He is standing in the back.
24. The map is hanging on the wall.
25. They all are sitting on the grass.

In sentence 21, (di) means to take or to lead. For instance, if a person is
giving another person a ride in their car or leading another person to a place (because
they dont know where it is). In sentence 22, (di) is used to express that the
students are repeating (aloud) what the teacher is saying.
Page 114 of 265

Unit 18
How Often / How Many Times
This unit introduces statements and questions regarding "how often" actions or events
occur as well as how to express how many times actions have occurred.

New Words
1.

chng chng
often
2.

c
(number of) times
3.

cng b
never
4.

d ji
vacation
5.

dun lin
to do physical exercise
6.

gng yun
park
7.

hn sho
not much, not many, not often
8.

jng chng
often
9.

l yu
to travel for pleasure
10.

po b
run
11.

tio w
to dance
12.

tng chng
regular, ordinary, normal
13.

yo
medicine
14.

yn dng
sports, participating in sports
15.

zhu m
weekend

Often
(jng chng) and (chng chng) have the same meaning. Depending on
context, they may mean "usually" or "often". They may not be placed at the beginning
of a sentence. They must always go after the subject and before the verb.
Prepositional phrases, ( ..... location), may be placed directly after the subject
(sentence 2) or after (jng chng) and (chng chng) (sentence 3).

1.
/
I often read.
2.

I often read at home.
3.

I often read at home.

1. w jngchng kn sh. / w chngchng knsh.
2. w chngchng zi ji kn sh.
3. w zi ji chngchng kn sh.

Page 115 of 265

Negative Statements
The most common way to express "not often" or "seldom" is (hn sho);
however, (b jng chng) may be used. (chng chng) is never used in a
negative statement. (hn sho) and (b jng chng) may not be placed at
the beginning of a sentence. They must always go after the subject and before the verb.
Prepositional phrases, ( ..... location), may be placed directly after the subject
(sentence 3) as well as after (hn sho) or (b jng chng), (sentences 4).

1. I don't read often. / I seldom read.
2. I don't read often. / I seldom read.
3. I seldom read at home.
4. I seldom read at home.
5. I never read at home.

1. w hn sho kn sh.
2. w b jngchng kn sh.
3. w zi ji hn sho kn sh.
4. w hn sho zi ji kn sh.
5. w cngb zi ji kn sh.

How Often
To express that something happens every day, week or month; time phrases are placed
at the beginning of the sentence or after the subject.

1.

I go to the park everyday.
2.

I go to the park every week.
3.

I watch TV every weekend.

1. w mitin q gngyun.
2. mi ge xngq w q gngyun.
3. w mi ge zhum kn dinsh.

When stating how often something happens within a specific time frame, the time
frame is stated at the beginning of the sentence or after the subject. The number of
times the thing happens within that time frame, is placed between the verb and the
object. In the sentences below, (tio w) (dance), (d ji) (take a vaction),
(kn dinsh) (watch TV), and (ch yo) (eat medicine) are verb-object
phrases. The number of times is expressed using (c), for example, (sn c)
means "3 times".
Page 116 of 265

One of these two patterns is used:

I go on vacation once a year.

time frame subject verb number of times object

y nin w d y c ji.

subject time frame verb number of times object

w y nin d y c ji.

1. I go dancing twice a month.
2. I watch TV three times a week.
3. I take medicine twice a day.
4. I go to Shanghai once a year.
5. I see my teacher once a week.

1. w y g yu tio ling c w.
2.
y g xngq w kn sn c dinsh
3.
w mitin ch ling c yo
4.
w mi nin q y c Shnghi
5.
w mi g xngq kn y c lo sh

When the object is a personal pronoun, as in, I see/meet him twice a week. , the
sentence pattern is:

time frame subject verb object number of times

mi g xngq w jin t y c

subject time frame verb object number of times

w mi g xngq jin t y c

Some two character verbs cannot be divided, for instance (dun lin) (to
physically exercise). In these cases, the sentence pattern below is used. It goes beyond
the scope of this book to list these words.
Page 117 of 265

I workout three time a week.

time frame subject verb number of times

mi g xngq w dunlin sn c

subject time frame verb number of times

w mi g xngq dunlin sn c

1. I travel once a year.
2. I play sports three time a week.

1.
w y nin lyu y c
2.
y g xngq w yndng snc

How Many Times
To express the number of times that something has occurred, the same sentences
pattern as above may be used.

1. I have been to Shanghai three times..
2. I went to Shanghai 3 times last year.
3. I ate once yesterday.
4. I saw him once yesterday.
5. I worked out three times last week.

1.
w q gu sn c Shnghi
2.
qnin w q gu sn c Shnghi
3.
w zutin ch le y c fn
4.
w zutin jin le t y c
5.
w shng g xngq dunlin le sn c

Normally / Usually
(tng chng) is used to express what ordinarily happens. Negative words cannot
be used before (tng chng) but it can be used to express that something doesnt
usually happen. For instance, in example 3.

1. He usually watches TV after dinner.
2. I usually workout three times a week.
Page 118 of 265

3.

There are usually no classes on
Saturday afternoon.

1. t tngchng wnfn hu kn dinsh
2. w tngchng mi y g xngq dunlin sn c
3. xngqli xiw tngchng miyu k

Questions
questions
/ Do you read often?

n jngchng kn sh ma/ n chngchng kn sh ma?

These questions may be answered affirmatively by simply saying (chng chng)
or (jng chng).

'How Often' questions
In English, the question "how often do you go dancing?", does not require the speaker
to specify a time frame or the frequency of occurrences. In Mandarin, when asking
"how often?" questions, the frequency of the actions or the time between their
occurrences must be specified.

One way to ask how often something happens, is to specify how many times an action
happens within a time frame. In this type of a question (j c), (how many
times?), is placed between the verb and the object. In the sentences below, (tio
w) (dance), (d ji) (take a vacation), and (kn dinsh) (watch TV) are
verb-object phrases. This kind of sentence may begin with the subject or a time frame.

1.

How many times do you take a
vacation in one year?
2.

How many times do you go dancing
in a month?
3.

How many times do you watch TV in
week?
4.

How many times do you work out in
a week?
5.

How many times a year do you
travel?
1. n y nin d j c ji?
2. y g yu n tio j c w?
3. n y g xngq kn j c dinsh?
4. n y g xngq dunlin j c?
5. n y nin lyu j c

Page 119 of 265

Another way to ask how often something happens, is to ask how much time passes
between each occurrence. This type of questions begins with (du chng
sh jin) which in this context asks, "how long between occurrences?". In this type of
question, (y c), which means "one time", is placed between the verb and the
object. This kind of sentence may begin with the subject (sentences 1, 3, 4, 5) or
(du chng sh jin) (sentences 2, 6).

1.

How often do you go on vacation?
2.

How often do you go dancing?
3.

How often do you watch TV?
4.

How often do you go running?
5.

How often do you workout?
6.

How often do you play sports?

1. n duchng shjin d y c ji?
2. duchng shjin n tio y c w?
3. n duchng shjin kn y c dinsh?
4.
n duchng shjin po y c b
5.
n duchng shjin dunlin y c
6. duchng shjin n yndng y c?

Note: (du chng sh jin) may also be used to ask how long something
happens. (refer to Unit 31 for a complete explanation of how to express the duration
of actions)

How long do you run each time?
30 minutes.

n mi c po duchng shjin
sn sh fn zhng

Page 120 of 265

Unit 19
How / Why / Like / Dislike
This unit deals with expressing purpose, methods, likes and dislikes.

New Words
1.

i
love
2.

bn gng sh
office
3.

bng
sick
4.

d ti
subway
5.

hi p
afraid
6.

hn
hate
7.

hu
return
8.

ki
drive, open, begin
9.

ki ch
drive a car (bus, truck)
10.

kn bng
see a doctor
11.

mo b
brush for calligraphy
12.

min tio
noodles
13.

p
to dislike, to fear
14.

q
ride (a bike, a horse, motorcycle)
15.

q ch
car
16

q z xng ch
ride a bike
17.

sh pn
foodstuffs
18.

to yn
hate, disgusting
19.

wnr
play, relax and enjoy oneself
20.

wi shn me
why
21.

wn zhng
article, passage, essay
22.

x huan
like
23.

xi xie
thanks, thank you
24.

xi xn
to write a letter
25.

xn
letter
26.

y fu
clothes
27.

yng
use
28.

zn me
how?
29.

zu
most
30.

zu x huan
favorite
31.

zu
to ride in a vehicle
Page 121 of 265

Expressing Purpose (Why)
In the following sentences, the predicate has two consecutive verbs or verbal phrases.
The order of these verb phrases is fixed. The first verb or verbal phrase indicates the
action and the second indicates the purpose of the action.

Note: When Chinese talk about going somewhere to relax and have a good time they
say play (wnr).

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.
I will go to the hospital to see a doctor this afternoon.
2.
I am going to my friend's home to play now.
3.
I went to the hospital to see a doctor this afternoon.
4.
I went to my friend's home to play yesterday.

1. w jntin xiw q yyun kn bng.
2. t xinzi q pngyou ji wnr.
3. w jntin xiw q yyun kn bng le.
4. w zutin q pngyou ji wnr le.

Negative Statements
1.

2.

3.

1.
She won't go to the store to go shopping tomorrow.
2.
I didn't go to the store to go shopping yesterday.
3.
I didn't go to the hospital to see a doctor this afternoon.

1. t mngtin b q shngdin mi dngxi.
2. t zutin mi q shngdin mi dngxi.
3. w jntin xiw mi q yyun kn bng.

Questions
questions:
1.
2.
3.
Page 122 of 265

4.

1. Will he go to the hospital to see a doctor this afternoon?
2. Are you going to a friend's home to play now?
3. Did he go to the hospital to see a doctor this afternoon?
4. Did he go to a friend's house to play yesterday?

1.
t jntin xiw q yyun kn bng ma
2.
n xinzi q pngyou ji wnr ma
3.
t jntin xiw q yyun kn bng le ma
4.
t zutin q pngyou ji wnr le ma

1.

2.

3.

1.
Will he go to the hospital to see a doctor this afternoon?
2.
Are you going to your friends to play now?
3.
Did he go to a friend's home to play yesterday?

1.
t jntin xiw q bu q yyun kn bng
2.
n xinzi q bu q pngyou ji wnr
3.
t zutin q mi q pngyou ji wnr

'Why' questions:
When asking why an action takes place, the following pattern is used:

(subject) (action)

wi shn me

1.

2.

3.

1. Why is he going to go to the hospital this afternoon?
2. Why are you going to a friend's house now?
3. Why did you go to the post office yesterday?

1.
t jntin xiw wi shnme q yyun
Page 123 of 265

2.
n xinzi wi shnme q pngyou ji
3.
n zutin wishnme q le yuj

1.

2.

3.

1.
When are you going to go shopping in Beijing?
2.
What will you buy at the store?
3.
What did you buy at the store?

1.
n shnme shhu q Bijng mi dngxi
2.
n q shngdin mi shnme
3.
n q shngdin mi shnme le

'or' questions

Are you going to the store to by food or
clothes?

n q shngdin mi shpn hishi mi yfu

Expressing Means and Method
In the following sentences, the predicate has two consecutive verbs or verbal phrases.
The order of these verb phrases is fixed. The first verb or verb phrase expresses the
means or method of second verb's action.

Note: In Mandarin, "going home" or "returning home" are both expressed as
"returning home", (hu) is always used.

1.

I use a brush to write Chinese
characters.
2.

We use computers to write articles.
3.

I go home by subway.
4.

I take the subway to my office.
5.

I go to my office by public bus.
6.

I ride my bike to my office.
7.

I drive to my office.
8.

I take a plane to Shanghai.

1. w yng mob xi hnz.
Page 124 of 265

2. wmen yng dinno xi wnzhng.
3. w zu dti hu ji.
4. w zu dti q bngngsh.
5. w zu gnggngqch q bngngsh.
6. w q zxngch q bngngsh.
7. w kich q bngngsh.
8. w zu fij q Shnghi.

Negative Statements
1.

I don't take the subway home.
2.

I didn't take the subway home
yesterday.
3.

I will not use a brush to write
Chinese characters this morning.
4.

I didn't use a brush to write Chinese
characters this morning.

1. w b zu dti hu ji.
2. w zutin mi zu dti hu ji.
3. w jntin shngw b yng mob xi hnz.
4. w jntin shngw mi yng mob xi hnz.

Questions
questions
1.

Does he take the train to Beijing?
2.

Did he take the train to Beijing?
3.

Did he take the train to Beijing
yesterday?

1. t zu huch q Bijng ma?
2. t zu hu ch q Bijng le ma?
3. zutin t zu huch q Bijng le ma?

Does he take the train to Beijing?

t sh bu sh zu huch q Bijng?

Page 125 of 265

'questions word' questions
When asking how an action takes place, the following pattern is used:

(subject)

(action)

zn me

1.

How does he go to Beijing?
2.

How do you write this character?

1. t znme q Bijng?
2.
zh ge z znme xi

'or' questions

Do you take the bus or
your car to go to work?

n zu fij q Shnghi hishi zu huch q Shnghi

Stating Likes and Dislikes
When stating likes and dislikes, if the predicate has two consecutive verbs or verbal
phrases, the order of these verb phrases is fixed. The first verb or verbal phrase
expresses the feeling the speaker has about the second verb's action. (examples 1 - 5)

When stating likes and dislikes, if there is no second verb, the verb indicates the
speaker's feelings about the object. This could be a condition, a place or a thing
(examples 6 - 9). To show stronger feelings (hn) or (fi chng) may be
added before words that express feelings (sentence 2, 7). The word meaning "to be
afraid" , (p), is often used to express dislike (sentence 9).

1.

I like to drink coffee.
2.

I like drinking coffee very much.
3.

I love to drink coffee.
4.

I like to eat noodles.
5.

I hate drinking coffee.
6.

I hate summer.
7.

I hate summer very much.
8.

I like Beijing.
9.

I dislike cold (weather).

1. w xhuan h kfi.
2. w hn xhuan h kfi.
Page 126 of 265

3. w i h kfi.
4. w xhuan ch mintio.
5. w toyn h kfi.
6. w toyn xitin.
7. w fichng toyn xitin.
8. w xhuan Bijng.
9. w p lng.

Negative Statements
1.

I dislike drinking coffee.
2.

I dislike drinking coffee very much.
3.

I dislike drinking coffee very much.
4.

I dont dislike cold (weather).

1. w b xhuan h kfi.
2. w hn b xhuan h kfi.
3. w fichng b xhuan h kfi.
4. w b p lng.
Questions
questions:
? Do you like to drink coffee?

n xhuan h kfi ma?

1. ? Do you like to drink coffee?
2. ? Do you like to drink coffee?

1. n xhuan bu xhuan h kfi?
2. n x bu xhuan h kfi?

'question word' questions:
1. ? What do you like to drink?
2. Who likes to drink coffee?
3. What is your favorite fruit?

1. n xhuan h shnme?
2.
shi xhuan h kfi
3.
n zu xhuan de shugu sh shnme

Page 127 of 265

Unit 20
Compliment of Potentiality ()
Sentences with no Action / Sentences with Potential Action
This first section of this unit deals with modifying verbs in sentences that have no
action. For example, in the sentence "He runs fast", "run" is a verb but there is not
action in the sentence. The second section deals with sentences with potential action.
For example in the sentence, Can you clean the stain out of this shirt?

New Words
1.

de
structural particle
2.

dng
understand
3.

gn jng
clean
4.

mn
slow
5.

qng chu
clear
6.

shu
sleep
7.

tng
listen, hear
8.

xi z
write, write letters or characters

Compliment of Potentiality
(Sentences with no Action)
When (de) is used after a verb, the verbs do not indicate an action. In the following
examples, (de) goes after the verbs and is used to connect the verbs to the words
that modify them. For instance, (w tng de dng hny) means "I
understand (spoken) Chinese". In this sentence, (de) is between the verb (tng)
(to hear) and the compliment of potentiality (dng) (to understand). It means the
speaker can understand Chinese by listening. This sentence has no action. The verb
may be further modified to indicate degree by using adverbs such as (hn) or
(fi chng) (sentence 6).

1.

t po de kui.
He runs fast.
2.

t po de mn.
He runs slowly.
3.

t shu d qngchu.
He speaks clearly.
4.

t xi de kui.
He writes fast.
5.

w shu de ho.
I sleep well.
6.

t po de hn kui.
He runs very fast.

When (de) is used with verb object phrases, such as (xi z) (write Chinese
characters) - both characters are stated, then the first character is stated again,
followed by (de) which is followed by the words that modify the verb. Adverbs
such as (hn) and (fi chng) may be used (sentences 4, 5).
Page 128 of 265

1.

He runs fast.
2.

He runs slowly.
3.

He writes fast.
4.

He speaks very clearly.
5.

I sleep very well.

1. t pob po de kui.
2. t pob po de mn.
3. t xiz xi de kui.
4. t shuhu shu de hn qngchu.
5. w shujio shu de hn ho.

Negative Statements
To make a negative statement, (de) is followed by (b). Adverbs such as (hn)
or (fi chng) may be not used in these statements.

1.

He does not run fast.
2.

He does not speak clearly.
3.

I do not write letters fast. (correspondence)
4.

I do not sleep well.
5.

He does not run fast.

1. t po de b kui.
2. t shu de b qngchu.
3. w xixn xi de b kui.
4. w shujio shu de b ho.
5. t pob po de b kui.

Questions
questions: single character verbs
t po de kui ma Does he run fast?

questions: two-character verb-object phrases
1.

Does he run fast?
2.

Does he write fast? (handwriting)

1. t pob po de kui ma?
2. t xiz xi de kui ma?

Page 129 of 265

Compliment of Potentiality
(Sentences with Potential Action)
This sentence structure may also be used to indicate if is something is possible.

Question 1: Do you understand Chinese?
Answer 1: I understand Chinese (from listening)
Question 2: Can you read Chinese?
Answer 2: I understand Chinese (from listening)

Question 1: n tng de dng hny ma
Answer 1: w tng de dng.
Question 2: n kn de dng hnz ma
Answer 2: w kn de dng.

If you went into a local dry cleaners and wanted to know if they could get a stain out
of your shirt, you would ask the question:
Note: Any article of clothing may be referred to as (y f).

1.

Can this be cleaned?
2.

1.
zh jin yfu x d gnjng ma
2.
zh jin yfu x d gnjng x b gnjng

The answer to the question would probably be:

1.

x d gnjng.
It can be cleaned.
2.

x b gnjng.
It cant be cleaned.

If you took your shirt into the dry cleaners and assumed that everything would go
smoothly, but the clerk realizes that your shirt cant be cleaned, then the clerk would
say:

zh jin yfu x b gnjng
This shirt cant
be cleaned.

Compliments of Potentiality are discussed further in Unit 22 where they are
compared to Compliments of Results.
Page 130 of 265

Unit 21
Comparisons
This unit introduces the sentence patterns used to compare actions that are different,
state that two actions are the same.

New Words
1.

zo
early

Comparing Actions
A is greater than B
A

B verb-object
A verb-compliment

A

B verb-compliment comparison standard
A verb-compliment

B comparison standard degree
A

B verb-compliment comparison standard degree

A is not greater than B
A

B verb-object
A verb-compliment

A

B verb-compliment comparison standard

A is equal to or greater than B
A


A is less than B
A


Stating two actions are the same
A is the same as B
A
/
B

verb-object
A verb-compliment
/
B

comparison standard
A
/
B

comparison standard

Stating two actions are not the same
A is not the same as B
A
/
B
verb-object
A verb-compliment
/
B
comparison
standard
A
/
B verb-compliment

comparison
standard
Comparing Two Actions ()
When using (b) to compare two actions, where A is greater than B, the following
pattern is used. In this pattern, the action is a verb-object phrase. A degree of
difference may not be stated here.
Page 131 of 265

A B
action

He likes music more than I do. t b w xhuan ynyu.

When comparing actions that are stated as complimented verbs (that is, verbs
modified with ) the verb compliment may be part of A or B. In this pattern, A is
greater than B and the comparison standard is stated last. The comparison standard
may be followed by a degree, which is optional. When stating the degree of difference,
an exact number or an approximation may be used. When stating an approximation,
(y dinr) and (y xi) are used for small differences while (de du)
and (du le) are used for relatively large differences.

A B
comparison standard degree
1.

2.

3.

4.

1.
He runs faster than I do.
2.
He runs faster than I do.
3.
He runs a little faster than I do.
4.
His Chinese is much better than mine.

1. t b w po de kui.
2. t po de b w kui.
3. t b w po de kui y dinr.
4. t hny b w shu de ho de du.

(b b) is used to state that A is not greater than B; however, this pattern is only
used to express disagreement or refutation. The standard of comparison is stated last.
Adverbs such as (hn) and (fi chng) may not be used to modify the
comparison standard.

He doesn't like music as much as I do.

A B
action

t b b w xhuan ynyu.

Page 132 of 265

A B
comparison standard
1.

2.

1. t b b w po de kui. He can't run as fast as I can.
2. t po de b b w kui. He can't run as fast as I can.

Questions
questions
Adding (ma) to the end of a (b) statement creates a yes-no question.

1.

Does he like music more than you do?
2.

Does he run faster than you do?
3.

Does he run a little faster than you do?

1. t b n xhuan ynyu ma?
2.
t po de b n kui ma
3.
t b n po de kui y dinr ma

Statements using (b) and (b b ) may be changed into affirmative-negative
questions by using (b bu b). In this sentence pattern, (ma) may not be
used.

1.

Does he like music more than you do?
2.

Does he run faster than you do?

1. t b bu b n xhuan ynyu?
2.
t po d b bu b n kui

Comparing Two Actions ( / )
When comparing two actions, the following pattern is used to express A is equal to or
greater than B:
A B
comparison standard
1.

2.

1. t po de yu w kui.
He runs at least as fast as I do.
2. t yu w po de kui.
He runs at least as fast as I do.
Page 133 of 265

1.

He draws at least as good as I do.
2.

You speak (a language) as well as he does.
3.

He is as least as fast (at this) as you are.

1. t hu de yu w ho.
2. n shu de yu t ho.
3. t zu de yu n zhme kui.

When comparing two actions, the following pattern is used to express A is less than B,
(mi) or (miyu) may be used. The standard of comparison is stated last.
Adverbs such as (hn) and (fi chng) cannot be used to modify the
comparison standard.
A () B
comparison standard
1.
()
2.
()

1.
He doesnt run as fast as I do.
t po de mi(yu) w kui.
2.
He doesnt run as fast as I do.
t mi(yu) w po de kui.

1. He is not better at drawing than I am.
2.

You are not better at speaking (a
language) than he is.
3. He is not faster (at this) than you are.
4. They did not arrive as early as us.

1. t hu de miyu w ho.
2. n shu de miyu t ho.
3. t zu de miyu n zhme kui.
4. tmen miyu wmen li de zo

Questions
questions
Adding (ma) to the end of a (yu) statement creates a question.

1.

Does he draw as well as I do?
2.

Do you speak (a language) as well as he does?

1.
t hu de yu w ho ma
2.
n shu de yu t ho ma

Page 134 of 265

Statements using (mi) or (mi yu) may use the (yu mi yu)
affirmative-negative question pattern. In this sentence pattern, (ma) may not be
used.

1.

Does he draw as well as I do?
2.

Do you speak (a language) as well as he does?

1.
t hu d yu mi yu w ho
2.
n shu d yu mi yu t ho

Stating that two actions are the same ()
When stating that two actions are the same, both things are linked with (gn) or
(h) followed by (y yng) followed by the action. When the action is expressed
by a verb-object phrase, the verb object phrase goes last.

He likes music as much as I do.

A / B
action (verb object phrase)

t gn/ h w yyng xhuan ynyu

When the action is expressed by a verb-compliment phrase (using de), the verb
compliment may be included in either A or B with the comparison standard last.

A / B
comparison
standard
1.

2.

Both of the sentences above (1 and 2) mean: He runs as fast as I do.

1. t po de gn w yyng kui
2. t h w po de yyng kui
Page 135 of 265

Stating Two Actions are the not Same ()
When stating that two actions are not the same, the sentence pattern is the same as
example sentences 1 and 2 above, except (b y yng) is used.

A / B
comparison
standard
1.

2.

Both examples mean: He doesn't run at the same speed as I do. (It does not indicate
which person is the fastest runner.)

1. t po de gn w b yyng kui
2. t h w po de b yyng kui

questions

1.

Does he like music as much as I do?
2.

Does he run as fast as you do?

1.
t gn w yyng xhuan ynyu ma
2.
t po de gn n yyng kui ma

Page 136 of 265

Unit 22
Verb 'Compliment of Result'
This unit deals with complimenting verbs to indicate the results their actions produce.

New Words
1.

b
measure word for movies
2.

ch
tea
3.

ch z ch
taxi
4.

cu
incorrect
5.

d
hit, send
6.

d din hu
make a telephone call
7.

d ji
everybody, everyone
8.

do
to arrive, to attain a goal
9.

d shang
on the floor, on the ground
10.

din hu
telephone
11.

fng
measure word for letters
12.

f
measure word for paintings
13.

gu
dog
14.

ho
successful, satisfactory, good
15.

hu
to paint or draw (a picture)
16.

hun
return (something)
17.

hur
painting, picture
18.

hu d
to answer
19.

jin
to meet, to see
20.

jio
to hand over or hand in something
21.

ji
street
22.

pin
measure word for literary articles
23.

qin
money
24.

qi
cut, clice
25.

sh f
sofa
26.

shu
receive
27.

sng
deliver, give (free of charge)
28.

tu
push
29.

wn
to complete, to finish
30.

wn fn
dinner
31.

w zi
room
Page 137 of 265

32.

x gu
watermelon
33.

xio gu
puppy
34.

y dng
already
35.

zi
to be at a place
36.

zu y
homework

Verb 'Compliment of Result'
An adjective or verb that is attached to a verb to complete its meaning is called a verb
compliment. There are many kinds of compliments including those that express
duration, quantity, degree, direction, possibility or result. In this unit we will only deal
with verb compliments that express results. This is done by adding a verb or adjective
after a verb to show the results produced by the action of the verb. For instance,
adding the verb (wn) (to finish) to the verb (ch) (to eat) becomes (ch
wn) (finish eating). Adding the adjective (cu) (incorrect) to the verb (shu)
(to speak) becomes (shu cu) (to speak incorrectly).

Referring to Unit 20, (w tng de dng hny) means "I understand
(spoken) Chinese". In this sentence, (de) is between the verb (tng) (to hear) and
the compliment of potentiality (dng) (to understand). It means the speaker can
understand Chinese by listening. This sentence has no action.

In the sentence, (w tng dng le t shu de hu) (I
understood what he said.), (de) is not used. The verb, (tng) (to hear), is
followed immediately by the verb, (dng) (to understand) which shows the results
produced by the verb (tng) (to hear). In this case, (dng) (to understand) is a
verb that is used as "verb compliment of results" that means that understanding was
the result of the action of hearing. The adjective (qng chu) (clear) is used in the
same way in the sentence, (w tng qngchu le t shu de
hu)" which means "I clearly heard what he said". No characters may be placed
between a verbs its compliment of results.

In this unit, we have chosen to use 7 verbs and 5 adjectives that are commonly used as
verb compliments of results to explain how compliments of results are used, however,
there are many more. In Section 1, we explain how these verbs and adjectives are
alone, not as compliments, so that their meanings will be clear. Section 2 has
examples of how they are used as compliments of results. Section 3 contrasts different
ways that compliments of results and compliments of potentiality are used in
conversation to clarify this idea.
Page 138 of 265

Section 1
Verbs and Adjectives

Verbs
These sentences explain how these verbs are used in verb object phrases, they are not
used as compliments in these sentences.

jin wn dng do zi gi ki

jin
to see, or perceive, to meet (someone)

(jin) is a single character action verb, it has two meanings, depending on context.
It can mean "to see or perceive" or it can mean "to meet (someone)". In modern
Chinese, when (jin) is used as a verb, it means to meet:

mngtin jin
I will meet you tomorrow.

hn ji mi jin
Long time, no see.

wn
finish, complete

(wn) is a verb, it is used at the end of computer games and movies to indicate
"finished"; however, it is most commonly used as a verb compliment.

dng to understand

1. Do you understand my meaning?
2. He understands Chinese.

1. n dng wde ys ma ?
2. t dng hny.

do arrive, reach

He has already arrived in Beijing.

t xinzi ydng do Bijng le

zi
to be at a place, an action in progress

(zi) is used as a verb that means "to be at a place".

Page 139 of 265

t zi tshgun. He is at the library.

gi
give

When used as an action verb, meaning "to give", (gi) usually has two objects. In
the example below, (t) is the first object and (sh) is the second.

w gi le t y bn sh I gave him a book.

ki
open, turn on, operate, begin

qng ki mn Please open the door.

Adjectives
These sentences explain how these characters are used adjectives. They are not used
as compliments in the sentences below.

du cu qng chu gn jng ho

1.

du
correct
2.

cu
incorrect, wrong
3.

qng chu
clear, easy to understand
4.

gn jng
clean
5.

ho
good, satisfactory, effective

1.

You are right, he is wrong.
2.

You are wrong.
3.

This map isn't clear.
4.

The room is clean.
5.

This is a good book.

1.
n dut b du.
2. n cu le.
3. zh zhng dt b qngchu.
4. wzi l hn gn jng.
5. zh bn sh hn ho.

Page 140 of 265

Section 2
Verb 'Compliment of Results'
These sentences show how to use the same verbs and adjectives, discussed above, as
compliments of results.

jin Action that results in discovery

1.

I see a taxi.
2.

I heard what he said.

1. kn jin w knjin y ling chzch.
2. tng jin w tngjin le t shu de hu.

dng Action that achieves understanding

1.

I understand what he is said.
2.

Can you understand this book?

1. tng dng w tngdng le t shu de hu.
2. kn dng
n kndng le zh bn sh ma

wn Action that results in completion

1.

I have finished eating
dinner.
2.

He finished drinking 3
cups of tea.
3.

I have finished writing
that article.
4.

Yesterday, we finished
watching that movie.
5.
My money is all used up.
6.

He finished his
homework.

1. ch wn w chwn wnfn le.
2. h wn t hwn sn bi ch le.
3. xi wn t xiwn le n pin wnzhng.
4. kn wn wmen zutin knwn le zh b dinyng.
5. yng wn w de qin yng wn le .
6. zu wn t zu wn le zuy .

Page 141 of 265

do Action that attains a goal / reaches a place

1. I found the bookstore.
2. I received his letter.
3. I met Mr. Wang.

1. zho do t zhodo le shdin.
2. shu do w shudo le tde xn.
3. jin do w jindo le Wng xinshng.

zi Action that results in being at a place

1. I live in Beijing.
2. Mr. Wang is sitting on the sofa.
3. A puppy is lying on the floor.

1. zh zi w zhzi Bijng.
2. zu zi Wng xinshng zuzi shf shang.
3. tng zi xio gu tngzi dshang.

gi Action that results in giving

1. He gave me a letter.
2. My big sister gave me a book.

1. jio gi t jiogi w y fng xn.
2. song gi jijie snggi w y bn sh.

ki Actions that achieves opening

1.
Open your book.
2.
The teacher opened the
classroom door.
3.
Mother cut the watermelon.

1. d ki dki nde sh.
2. tu ki losh tuki le jiosh de mn.
3. qi ki mm qiki le xgu.
Page 142 of 265

du Action that is done correctly

1. What he said is correct.
2. You answered correctly.

1. shu du t shudu le.
2. hud du n huddu le.

cu Action that is done incorrectly

1. You wrote this incorrectly.
2. You dialed (the telephone) incorrectly.

1. xi cu n xicu le.
2. d cu n dcu le.

qngchu Action that results in being clear

1. I saw clearly.
2. I heard clearly.
3. He spoke clearly.

1. kn qngchu w knqngchu le.
2. tng qngchu w tngqngchu le.
3. shu qngchu t shuqngchu le.

gn jng Action that results in being clean

1. The cup was washed (clean).
2. The blackboard was wiped clean.

1. x gn jng bizi x gnjng le.
2. c gn jng hibn c gnjng le.

ho Action that is completed successfully

1. Please, (everyone) sit down.
2. I put my bike away.
Page 143 of 265

3. She is finished with her homework.

1. zu ho qng dji zuho.
2. fng ho w fngho zxngch le.
3. zu ho t zuho zuy le.

Negative Statements
To make a negative statement using a verb 'compliment of results', (mi) or
(mi yu) are placed before the verb-compliment character combination. (le) may
not be used in these negative sentences.

I do not /did not see a taxi.
I do not /did not see a taxi.

mi knjin w mi knjin y ling chzch.
miyu knjin w miyu knjin y ling chzch.

Questions
questions

Do / did you see a taxi?

knjin
n knjin y ling chzch le ma

questions
To form a question using a verb 'compliment of results', (mi yu) may be
placed at the end of sentences.


knjin
n knjin y ling chzch le miyu

When using a compliment of result, an affirmative negative question is expressed by
using the following form:

verb -- -- verb compliment of result


knjin
n kn mi kn jin y ling chzch

Page 144 of 265

Section 3
Using Compliment of Results
and Compliments of Potentiality

In the examples below, when a compliment is a compliment of results it is
abbreviated (R) and a compliment that is a compliment of potentiality is
abbreviated (P).

If someone were to ask you if your friend understands Chinese, they would say:

Question 1: Can he understand Chinese? (P)

In this case, you would answer as below.

Answer 1A: He does not understand Chinese. (P)
Answer 1B: He understands Chinese. (P)

Question 1: t tng d dng hny ma
Answer 1A: t tng b dng
Answer 1B: t tng d dng

If someone wanted to know if you understand what was just said, they would ask:

Question 2: Did you understand what was said?(R)

Question 2: n tng dng le ma

You could make a general statement that you dont understand Chinese, which does
not refer to the action of listening, it refers to the ability to understand.

Answer 2A: I dont understand Chinese. (P)

Answer 2A: w tng b dng

If you usually understand Chinese fairly well, but arent following the conversation
well because your vocabulary is limited or the speaker is talking to fast, you would
answer as below. This statement refers to the action of listening:

Answer 2B: I didnt understand what was said. (R)

Answer 2B: w mi tng dng

Page 145 of 265

If you understood everything that was just said, you would say:

Answer 2C: I understand what was said. (R)

Answer 2C: w tng dng le

If you usually understand Chinese and are having difficulty understanding what is
being said because of circumstances, for instance, you are on a noisy bus talking on a
cell phone you would say:

Answer 2D: I didnt understand clearly. (P)

Answer 2D: w tng b qngchu

If you are having trouble clearly understanding what the speaker is saying because
your Chinese isnt very good, you would say:

Answer 2E: I didnt understand clearly. (R)

Answer 2E: w mi tng qngchu

To tell someone to listen carefully, you would say:

Statement: Listen carefully. (R)

Statement: tng qngchu

If someone wanted to know if you could read Chinese, they would ask:

Question 3: Can you read Chinese?(P)

Answer 3A: I can read Chinese. (P)
Answer 3B: I cant can read Chinese. (P)

Question 3: n kn d dng hnzi ma
Answer 3A: w kn d dng
Answer 3B: w kn b dng

Page 146 of 265

If some gave you a specific Chinese text , after you have tried to read it they would
say:

Question 4: Could you read it?(R)

Question 4: n kn dng le ma

You could answer in the following ways:

Answer 4A: I can read it. (R)
Answer 4B: I cant can read it. (R) (it is too difficult)
Answer 4C: I cant can read it. (P) (I cant read Chinese)

Answer 4A: w kn dng le
Answer 4B: w mi kn dng
Answer 4C: w kn b dng

You are at a train station meeting a friend. You are standing at the north end of the
plaza that is in front of the train station. You are talking on your cell phones and you
inform him that you are at the station but you cant find him due to circumstances, for
instance, the station is very crowded and spotting one person in the crowd is not
possible. You would say either statement 1 or statement 2:

Statement 1:
w zho b do n. I cant find you. (P)
Statement 2:
w kn b jin n. I cant see you. (P)

You suddenly see your friend and tell him (on your cell phone):

I see you. (R) kn jin le

You left your bag under the table at a fast food restaurant where you had just eaten
lunch. You go back to the restaurant and find your bag. You tell the person you are
talking to on your cell phone:

I found it. (R) zho do le

You are looking around your apartment for your Chinese book. Your roommate tells
you that your book is on the kitchen table. As you are coming out of the kitchen, your
roommate could ask you:

Question 5: Did you see it?(R) n kn jin le ma

Page 147 of 265

If you did not see the book in the kitchen, you would say:

Answer 5A: I didnt see it. (R) w mi kn jin

If you found your book, you would say:

Answer 5B: I found it. (R) zho do le

If you had left your shirt at a laundry shop and knew that it was questionable if the
stain in your shirt could come out, when you see the clerk you could ask:

Question 6: Were you able to get the stain out? (R)

Answer 6A: It is clean. (R)
Answer 6B: () It didnt come out. (R)

Question 6: n jin yfu x gnjng le ma

Answer 6A: x gnjng le
Answer 6B: (zh jin yfu) mi x gnjng

Page 148 of 265

Unit 23
Directional Verbs
Verb Phrases That Use and

New Words
1.

shng bn
to start work, to be at work
2.

shng ch
to get into a vehicle
3.

shng chun
to get in a boat
4.

shng ji
to set out on a (local) trip (ie., to go
shopping)
5.

shng k
to start class, to be in class
6.

shng lu
to go upstairs
7.

shng l
to set out on (long) jouney
8.

shng xu
to go to school (daily classes or begin a
major course)
9.

xi bn
to get off work
10.

xi ch
to get out of a vehicle
11.

xi chun
to get out of a boat
12.

xi k
to end a class
13.

xi lu
to go downstairs
16.

xi xu
to end a day of school
17.

xi xu
to snow
18.

y
night

In Unit 16, (shng) and (xi) were the second characters in words for locations,
for instance, (lu shng) (upstairs) and (lu xi) (downstairs). In this unit,
(shng) and (xi) are the first characters of verb-object phrases, that indicate
direction. For instance, (shng lu) refers to the action of going upstairs and
(xi lu) means the action of going downstairs. (shng) involves actions
including: going up, going in, or getting started; (xi) verbs involve going
down, going out, or finishing.

Additional Phrases
1. shng yng y k to start / to be in - an English class
2. shng y bn to begin / to be at - a night job
3. shng w lu to go up to the fifth floor
4. xi d y to rain heavily
5. xi xio xu to snow lightly

Page 149 of 265

Depending on context, (shng k) may express the action of beginning a class or
it may express the fact that someone is in a class at the present moment. To begin a
class, teachers say (shng k), which means begin class. If someone were to
ask, Where is he?, the answer would be (t xinzi zhngzi
shngk) which means, he is in class now. (shng bn) is the same. These
directional verbs follow the same rules as action verbs discussed in Units 10 -12.

Habitual or Intentional Actions
1. I go start work everyday at seven 7:30 am.
2. He usually takes a taxi to work.
3. I drive to work everyday.
4. I ride a bike to work.

1. w mitin zoshang q din bn shngbn.
2. t jngchng zu chzch shngbn.
3. w mitin kich shngbn.
4. w q zxngch shngbn.

Actions in Progress
t zhngzi shnglu. He is going upstairs (now).

Completed Action
t shngbn le. He has started work.

Negative Statements
1. I didnt go to work yesterday.
2. I will not go to work tomorrow.
3. It is not raining now.

1. zutin w mi shngbn.
2. mngtin w b shngbn.
3. xinzi b xiy.

Questions
questions:
1. Are they in class?
2. Did they go to class yesterday?

1.
tmen zi shngk ma
2.
zutin tmen shngk le ma
Page 150 of 265

questions:
1. Did they go to class yesterday?

1.
zutin tmen shngk le miyu

'questions word' questions:
1. () What time do you start class
2. What classes do you have tomorrow?

1.
n j din (zhng) shngk
2.
mngtin n shng shnme k

'affirmative-negative' questions:
1. Did you have class yesterday?
2. Do you work tomorrow?

1. zutin n shng mi shngbn
2. mngtin n shng bu shngbn

Page 151 of 265

Unit 24
Will / Want / Think / Should / Must
(Auxiliary Verbs)
Section 1 of this unit explains (yo) and (xing) as they are used as verbs that
express desire and opinion. Other verbs that express the same meaning are also
included. Section 2 explains how (yo) and (xing) are used as auxiliary verbs
that express necessity, possibility and willingness. Other verbs and auxiliary verbs
that are related to advice, intentions and opinions are also introduced.

New Words
1.

bi
white
2.

bo go
report
3.

b x
must
4.

chn shn
shirt
5.

chu yn
smoke (cigarettes, etc.)
6.

di
to have to, must, to need to
7.

f pio
receipt
8.

ju de
to think, to feel
9.

gi
should
10.

ji
alcohol, alcoholic drinks
11.

rn shi
to meet someone, to know someone
12.

rn wi*
opinion
13.

tio
measure word for skirts and dresses
14.

xing
think, want, miss (long for)
15.

yo
want, will, intend
16.

yng gi
should
17.

yu yng
swim
18.

zn me yng
how? (when asking about the
condition of something or someone)
19.

zho j
worry, hurry
20.

zh y
pay attention to
* Pronunciation tip: the in (rn wi) is pronounced in the second tone, not in the fourth tone as
in the in (yn wi) (because) and (wi shn me) (why).
Page 152 of 265

Section 1
Verbs

Want (verb - - yo)
When is used as a verb, it means "to want".

He wants a dictionary.
t yo y bn cdin.

Negative Statements
1.

I do not want a white dress, I want
a red dress.
2.
I do not want a receipt.
3.

Yesterday, he didnt want a
receipt.

1.
w b yo bi qnziw yo hng qnzi.
2. w b yo fpio.
3. zutin t mi yo fpio.

Questions
questions
When answering a " (yo) " question - stating (b yo) or (yo) is enough.

Question:
n yo fpio ma Do you want a receipt?

Answer (a)
b yo
I do not want (a receipt).
Answer (b)
yo
I want (a receipt).

1. What do you want?
2. Who wants a receipt?
3. When do you want the report?

1. n yo shnme
2. shi yo fpio
3. n shnme shhou yo bogo

'affirmative negative' questions
n yo bu yo fpio
Do you want a receipt?

Page 153 of 265

'or' questions
Do you want tea or coffee?

n yo ch hishi kfi?

Think (verb - - xing)
When expressing an opinion or when the speaker is not certain, (xing) is used as a
verb, it means "to think something is true". It may also express the feeling of
"missing" something or someone.

1. I think he is Chinese.
2. I think this city is very beautiful.
3. I miss Mother.

1. w xing t sh zhnggurn.
2. w xing zh ge chngsh hn pioliang.
3. w xing mma.

In common conversation, Chinese people use (ju de) to express the above ideas.

1. I think he is Chinese.

1. w jude t sh zhnggurn.
2. w jude zh ge chngsh hn pioliang.

Negative Statements
(b rn wi), discussed below, or (ju de) are used to express I do not
think (something is true). (xing) may be used in a negative expression, as in
sentences 1 and 2 below, but (b xing), when used as a verb, means do not
miss (do not long for) as in (w b xing mm) (I dont miss mother).
(b xing) is more commonly used when (xing) is used as an auxiliary verb
(Section 2).

1. I think what you said is incorrect.
2. I think he is not Chinese.
3. I do not think this skirt is pretty.
4. I do not think this skirt is pretty.

1. w xing n shucu le.
Page 154 of 265

2. w xing t b sh zhnggurn.
3. w b jude zh tio qnzi pioliang
4. w jude zh tio qnzi b pioliang

Questions
questions
1. Do you think he is Chinese?
2. Do you think this city is beautiful
3. Do you think he is Chinese?
4. Do you think this city is beautiful
5. Do you miss your mother?

1. n xing t sh zhnggurn ma?
2. n xing zh ge chngsh pioliang ma
3. n jude t sh zhnggurn ma?
4. n jude zh ge chngsh pioliang ma
5. n xing nde mma ma

Do you miss your mother?

n xing bu xing nde mma

Think / Opinion (verb - rn wi)
When expressing an opinion or when the speaker is not certain, (rn wi) is used
as a verb that expresses in my opinion or I think.

1. I think what you said is correct.

1. w rnwi n shu de du.
2. w rnwi zh ge chngsh hn pioliang.

In common conversation, Chinese people use (ju de) to express the above ideas.

1. I think what you said is correct.

1. w jude n shu de du.
2. w jude zh ge chngsh hn pioliang.
Page 155 of 265

Negative Statements
(b rn wi) or (ju de) are used to express I do not think (something is
true).

1.

I do not think what you said is
correct.
2. I do not think he is Chinese.
3. I do not think this city is beautiful.
4. I do not think he is Chinese.
5. I do not think this city is pretty.
6.

I do not think what you said is
correct.
7. I think you are wrong.

1. w b rnwi n shu de du.
2. w b rnwi t sh zhnggurn.
3. w b rnwi zh ge chngsh pioliang.
4. w b rnwi t sh zhnggurn.
5. w b rnwi zh ge chng sh pioliang.
6. w jude n shu d b du
7. w jude n b du

Questions
questions
Do you think he is Chinese?

n rnwi t sh zhnggurn ma?

1. What nationality do you think he is?
2. What do you think?
3. What do you think?

1. n rnwi sh n gu rn?
2. n rnwi znmeyng?
3. n jude znmeyng?

(rnwi) is not used in an affirmative-negative phrase.

Page 156 of 265

1.

Do you think what I said is
correct?
2.

Do you think this city is
beautiful?

1. n rnwi w shu d du bu du
2. n rnwi zh g chngsh pioliang bu pioliang

Need (verb - - x yo)
In the examples below, the verb (x yo) is used to form sentences that express
needs or requirements.

1. I need to go to the hospital.
2. You need to ask the teacher.
3. I need to buy a dictionary.

1. w xyo q yyun.
2. n xyo wn losh.
3. w xyo mi y bn cdin.

Need (verb - - di)
In the examples below, the verb (di) is used to form sentences that express needs
or requirements.

1. I need to go to the hospital.
2. You need to ask the teacher.
3. I need to buy a dictionary.

1. w di q yyun.
2. n di wn losh.
3. w di mi y bn cdin.

Negative Statements
It is common to use (b yng) to reply to a question about if something
necessary. For instance, a taxi driver may ask, (yo f pio ma) (Do
you want a receipt?), the passenger can reply (b yng) (that is not necessary).

1. I do not need to go to the hospital.
2. You do not need to ask the teacher.
3. I do not need to buy a dictionary.

Page 157 of 265

1. w b xyo q yyun.
2. n b xyo wn losh.
3. w b xyo mi cdin.

1. I do not need to go to the hospital.
2. You do not need to ask the teacher.
3. I do not need to buy a dictionary.

1. w b yng q yyun.
2. n b yng wn losh.
3. w b yng mi cdin.

Questions
questions
n xyo q yyun ma
Do you need to go to
the hospital?

shi xyo q yyun
Who needs to go to the
hospital?

() Do you need to go to the hospital?

n x (yo) bu xyo q yyun

Section 2
Auxiliary Verbs
Verbs that are used to "help" other verbs to express necessity, possibility and
willingness are called auxiliary verbs. They may not be negated with (mi), only
(b) is used. They may be modified with adverbs such as , , (hn, ti,
fichng). When auxiliary verbs are used in a question, the auxiliary verbs may be
used as a one word answers. For example, (n xing q Shnghi
ma?) (Would you like to go to Shanghai?) may be answered by simply saying
(xing).
Want / Will (Auxiliary Verbs - - yo / - xing)
When (yo) and (xing) are used as auxiliary verbs, (yo) emphasizes
demand, actual need or intention, while (xing) places more emphasis on the
feeling of wanting.

1.

I (will / want to) go to the store and go
shopping.
2.

I (will / want to) study Chinese.
Page 158 of 265

3.

I (will / want to) drink coffee.
4.

I would like to drink coffee.
5.

I would like to study Chinese.
6.

I would like to go to the store and go
shopping.
7.

Mr. Wang would like to meet her.

1. w yo q shngdin mi dngxi.
2. w yo xux hny.
3. w yo h kfi.
4. w xing h kfi.
5. w xing xux hny.
6. w xing q shngdin mi dngxi.
7. Wng xinshng xing rnshi t.

Negative Statements
When expressing that one does not have the desire to do something, (b xing)
is used.

1. I do not want to drink coffee.
2. Mr. Wang doesnt want to meet him.

1. w b xing h kfi.
2. Wng xinshng b xing rnshi t.

Questions
questions
n xing q Shnghi ma
Do you want to go
to Shanghai?

1.
?
Why do you want to study Chinese?
Why will you study Chinese?
2.
,?
Tomorrow is Sunday, what would
you like to do?
3.
?
Where would you like to go?
4.

Who would like to drink coffee?

1. n wishnme yo xux hny?
2. mngtin sh xngqtin, n xing zu shnme?
3. n xing q nr?
4. shi xing h kfi
Page 159 of 265

1. Would you like to drink coffee?
2. Would you like to study Chinese?
3. Do you want a receipt?

1. n xing bu xing h kfi?
2. n xing bu xing xux hny?
3. n yo bu yo fpio?

Should (Auxiliary verbs - - yng gi and - yo)
When giving advice, (yng gi), and (yo) are used as auxiliary verbs to
express "should". (yng gi) can be used to express advice (sentence 1) or
conjecture (sentence 2). When (yo) is used to give advice, it expresses a relatively
strong demand or need (example sentence 3).

1. You should learn to swim.
2. They must have already eaten.
3. You should pay attention to pronunciation.

1. n ynggi xux yuyng.
2. tmen ynggi ch gu le.
3. n yo zhy fyn.

Negative Statements
(b yng gi) or (b gi) are used to give advice that means "should not".

n b ynggi chuyn. You should not smoke.
n b ynggi h ji. You should not drink.

Questions
questions
Should I wear my new shirt?

w ynggi chun xn chnshn ma?


w ynggi chun shnme?
What should I
wear?

Page 160 of 265

1. Should I wear my new shirt?
2. Should I wear my new shirt?

1. w ynggi bu ynggi chun xn chnshn?
2. w yng bu ynggi chun xn chnshn?

Must (Auxiliary Verb - - b x)
When expressing a necessity resulting from obligation or basic requirement due to
circumstances, (b x) is used.

1. You must study Chinese.
2. You must go to the hospital.

1. n bx xux hny.
2. n bx q yyun.

Negative Statements
(b b) is used to give advice that means "do not need to" or "not necessary".
The word (zho j) can mean hurry or worry, depending on context.

1. You do not need to go to the hospital.
2. We do not need to have a meeting.
3. He doesn't need to work on weekends.
4. You do not need to hurry (worry).

1. n b b q yyun.
2. wmen b b kihu.
3. t b b zi zhum gngzu.
4. n b b zhoj.

1. You do not need to go to the hospital.
2. We do not need to have a meeting.
3. He doesn't need to work on weekends.
4. You do not need to hurry (worry).

1. n b yng q yyun.
2. wmen b yng kihu.
3. t b yng zi zhum gngzu.
4. n b yng zhoj.
Page 161 of 265

Questions
questions
1. Do I need to wear a white shirt?
2. Do you need to go to Shanghai?

1. w bx chun bi chnshn ma
2. n bx q Shnghi ma

1. What do I need to do?
2. Who needs to go to Shanghai?
3. When do you need to go to Shanghai?

1. t bx zu shnme
2. shi bx q Shnghi
3. n shnme shhou bx q Shnghi

Page 162 of 265

Unit 25
Can / Able / Possible / Probable / Will
(Auxiliary Verbs)
This unit introduces how to understand (hu), (nng) and (k y) and
(lio) as they are all used to express ability and possibility.

New Words
1.

ci
food
2.

chng
sing
3.

d qi
to play (a ball game)
4.

d yn
to print (computer)
5.

do
measure word for math problems
6.

d
read, study
7.

fn y
to translate
8.

g
song
9.

hi
dark, black
10.

hui
broken
11.

hun
to exchange
12.

hu
can, will, probably
13.

jin
measure word for affairs and
matters
14.

jing
speak, say, tell
15.

k bn
textbook
16.

k y
allow, permit, may
17.

l
spicey hot
18.

ln qi
basketball
19.

lio
verb compliment indicating
possibility
20.

n
to carry in ones hand, to fetch
21.

nng
can, will
22.

png png qi
ping pong, table tennis
23.

q ch
to ride a bike
24.

q m
to ride a horse
25.

shng bng
fall ill, become sick
26.

sh
matters or affairs
27.

shu
to receive
28.

sh xu
math (as a subject)
29.

shu png
level
Page 163 of 265

30.

s j
driver
31.

tng
to have pain
32.

tu
leg
33.

wi xin
dangerous
34.

wn jin
documents, papers
35.

wn t
question, problem
36.

xio hu
joke
37.

xi l
to repair
38.

y jng
already

Can (ability or knowledge) (Verb - - hu)
may be used as a verb; as in the sentence: " (t hu zhngwn.)",
which means, "He can (speak) Chinese". However, it is most commonly used as an
auxiliary verb as in the examples below.

Can (Auxiliary Verb - - hu)
(hu) is used an auxiliary verb to express "having ability, understanding or
knowledge".

1.

She speaks Chinese.
2.

He is good at telling jokes.
3.

She can sing.
4.

He can ride a horse, he can also
ride a bicycle.

1. t hu shu zhngwn.
2. w hn hu jing xiohu.
3. t hu chngg.
4. t hu qmt y hu q zxngch.

Negative Statements
1. She does not speak English.
2. She does not know how to play basketball.
3. I am not very good at writing essays.

1. w b hu shu yngwn.
2. t b hu d lnqi.
3. w b ti hu xi wnzhng.

Page 164 of 265

Questions
questions
1. Can she speak Chinese?
2. Do you know how to write in Chinese?
3. Do you know how to play ping pong?
4. Do you know how to ride a horse?

1.
t hu shu zhngwn ma
2.
n hu xi hnz ma
3.
n hu d pngpngqi ma
4.
n hu qm ma

1. What languages do you speak?
2. Who can speak Chinese?

1.
n hu shu shnme yyn
2.
shi hu shu hny

Does she speak Chinese?

t hu bu hu shu zhngwn ?

Possibly / Probably (Auxiliary Verb - )
(hu) is used as an auxiliary verb when talking about future possibilities,
probabilities and intentions. The difference between and (hu) and (yo) is that
while both characters express intentions and future events, expresses necessity
through need, or a more certain outcome. (hu) is used to express future events that
happen as a matter of course. When saying "I will go to Beijing tomorrow." - "
(mngtin w yo q Bijng)" is more certain than "
(mngtin w hu q Bijng)".

1. Everyone will (probably) agree on this matter.
2. It will (probably) rain tomorrow.
3. I will (probably) give you a call tomorrow.

1. dji hu tngy zh jin sh.
2. mngtin hu xiy.
Page 165 of 265

3. mngtin w hu gi n d dinhu.

Negative Statements
1.

Everyone will (probably) not agree on
this matter.
2. It will (probably) not rain tomorrow.
3. I will not give you a call tomorrow.

1. dji b hu tngy zh jin sh.
2. mngtin b hu xiy.
3. mngtin w b hu gi n d dinhu.

Questions
questions
dji hu tngy ma Will everyone agree?

1. Can he have left already?
2. Will it rain tomorrow?

1. t hu bu hu yjng zu le?
2. mngtin hu bu hu xiy?

Can (Auxiliary Verb - )
(nng) can be used to express -
A) having the 'capability' to do something through talent or knowledge
B) having the 'possibility' of doing something provided by circumstances.

1. capability
2. capability
3. possibility
4. possibility

1. She speaks Chinese. / She can speak Chinese.
2. I know how to use a computer.
3. My computer is repaired, I can print your file.
4. (It is possible that) he can come to Beijing.

1. t nng shu zhngwn.
2. w nng yng dinno.
3. wde dinno xi ho lew nng dyn nde wnjin.
Page 166 of 265

4. t nng li Bijng.
Negative Statements
1. capability
2. capability
3. possibility
4. possibility

1. I can't read a Chinese newspaper.
2. I don't know how to use a computer.
3. No smoking in here.
4. My computer is broken, I can't print your document.

1. w b nng kn zhngwn bozh.
2. w b nng yng dinno .
3. zh l b nng chuyn.
4. wde dinno hui lew b nng dyn nde wnjin.

Questions
questions
1. capability
2. capability
3. possibility
4. possibility

1. Can you translate this book?
2. Does she speak Chinese?
3. Can you go to China?
4. Can little Wang go to university?

1. n nng fny zh bn sh ma
2. t nng shu zhngwn ma
3. n nng q zhnggu ma
4. xio Wng nng q dxu ma

capability: At a job interview, the question : ? (n nng gn shnme?)
means, "What are your job related abilities?"

possibility: If a group of tourists are stranded in a broken down bus, ?
(wmen nng gn shnme?) means, "What can we do to get back to the hotel?"
Page 167 of 265

1. capability
2. possibility

1. Can the driver repair this bus?
2. Can we change buses?

1. sj nng bu nng xil zh ling ch
2. wmen nng bu nng hun ch

Possibility (may / can) (Auxiliary Verb - - ky)
(ky) is used to express when something is "possible".

1.

After class you may ask the teacher
questions.
2. We may smoke outside.
3. You may go to Shanghai.

1. xik yhou n ky wn losh wnt.
2. wmen ky zi wimian chuyn.
3. n ky q Shnghi.

Negative Statements
Negative statements are made using (b nng) .
(note : (b k y) is not used to express "it is not possible".)

1. You may not smoke here.
2. You may not go home.
3. When you drive you may not drink.

1. nmen b nng zi zhr chuyn.
2. n b nng hu ji.
3. kich deshhou b nng h ji .

Questions
questions
1. Can we smoke in the classroom?
2. May I smoke?
3. May I use the computer?
4. May I watch TV?
Page 168 of 265

1. jiosh lky chuyn ma
2. w ky chuyn ma
3. w ky yng dinno ma
4. w ky kn dinsh ma

1. Who can watch TV?
2. What may the children do?

1. shi ky kn dinsh
2. hizmen ky zu shnme

? Can you go to his house?

n k bu ky q t de ji ?

(lio) - possible / not possible

Verb + ( Verb + de lio ) = possible
Verb + ( Verb + b lio ) = not possible

(lio) is used after a verb with (de) or (b) as a verb compliment of
potentiality to show if an action can take place or if an action is possible to finish. In
the following examples, (nng) has the same meaning as (de lio) and
(b nng) has the same meaning as (b lio). These sentences are used to
express whether an action can take place or be completed.

1.
2.
3.
4.

1. jntin w yu shjinnng q
2. jntin w yu shjinq de lio
3. jntin w miyu shjinb nng q
4. jntin w miyu shjinq b lio

Page 169 of 265

1 / 2. I have time today, I can go.
3 / 4. I dont have time today, I cant go.

To form a questions, (ma) is added to the end of the sentence.

I am going to the bookstore
today, can you go?
jntin w q shdinn q de lio ma

I have some things to do, I
cant go.
jntin yu shq b lio

(de lio) and (b lio) are also used to indicate whether an act is able to be
finished.

Can you eat that many
dumplings?
n ch de lio zhme du jiozi ma

/
Yes I can. / No I cant.
ch de lio / ch b lio

When trying to dissuade someone from doing something, only the pattern (b
nng) + V is used. (In the sentence below, (n q b lio ) would be
incorrect.)

It is too dangerous there, you cant go.

nr ti wixinn b nng q

When indicating that something cant be done because of lack the ability, the sentence
below is used. In this case, you would not say: (n b nng n) .

1.

There are too many things, you
cant carry them.

dngxi ti du len n b lio

When indicating that conditions are not sufficient, we normally use a verb
compliment as in the sentence below. In this case, you would not say (w
b nng kn jin). (as discussed in Unit 20 and Section 3 of Unit 22)
Page 170 of 265

2. The room is too dark, I cant see.

wzi l ti hiw kn b jin

(shu b lio) is used to say cant stand (something).

1. I cant stand hot weather.
w shu b lio ti r de tinq
2.
The weather is too hot! I
cant stand it.
tinq ti r w shu b lio

Example Sentences

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.
This food is too spicy, I cant eat it.
2.
My Chinese level is too low, I cant study this text.
3.
I will drive, I cant drink.
4.
He is ill, he cant come to class today.
5.
I dont recognize this character, I cant read it.
6.
My legs hurt, I cant walk there.

1.
zh g ci ti lw ch b lio
2.
wde hny shupng ti dw xu b lio zh
g kbn
3.
w yo kichw h b lio ji
4.
t shng bng lejn tin t shng b lio k
5.
w b rnsh zh g zw d b lio
6.
w tu tngw zu b lio

Page 171 of 265

Unit 26
If / Then / Because / Don't / Other / But / Still
This unit introduces how to use (ji ) which is used in sentence patterns that make
"if-then" and "as soon as" statements. Other ways to say "then", using (ci) and
(rn hu) are shown as well.

New Words
1.

bi
other, do not
2.

bi de
other(s)
3.

ci
then
4.

chng chng
the Great Wall
5.

d ro
disturb
6.

dn sh
but
7.

dng fng
eastern, Asia
8.

d sh
to study
9.

f m
parents
10.

go s
tell
11.

g gng
Forbidden City (historical site in
Beijing)
12.

hi
still, yet, still more, also, (used for
emphasis)
13.

ji hn
married
14.

ki fng
to make open to the public
15.

l ki
leave
16.

lng wi
other, besides
17.

rn hu
then, afterwards
18.

r gu
if
19.

shng hu
life
20.

s
die
21.

su y
so
22.

tn
talk, discuss
23.

wn hu
culture
24.

xin
first
25.

yo shi
if
26.

zh me
so, very
27.

zh
only
28.

zh do
to know
Page 172 of 265

29.

zu ho
best

BecauseSo
The following sentence patterns are used to express because and so.

1.

because so......
2.
because ,
3.

so
4.

because

1. (ynwisuy) because .so.

reason

action or event

Because he is sick, so (he) didnt go to work today.

ynwi t yu bng suy mi shngbn.

Because he works and lives in China, so he studies Chinese.

ynwi zi zhnggu gngzu h shnghusuy t xux
hny

2.

(ynwi ) because ,

reason

action or event

Because he lives in China, he studies Chinese.

ynwi zi zhnggu shnghu, t xux hny.

3. (suy) so.

reason

action or event

Page 173 of 265

He likes eastern culture, so he wants to go to China.

t xhuan dngfng wnhu, suy t yo q zhnggu.

4. (ynwi) because

action or event

reason

He will go to Shanghai because his parents live there.

t q Shnghi ynwi tde fm zh zi n l.

IfThen
The following ifthen statements if expresses suppose that (a condition
were true). In these sentence patterns (1-5), the subject is optional.

IF THEN
1. condition (subject) action or event



()

If you have any questions, (you) ask me.

yoshi yu wnt (n) ji wn w.

1.

If it rains, I will take an umbrella.
2.

If you are thirsty, drink some tea.
3.

If I go to China, I will study
Chinese.

1. yoshi xiy w ji di ysn.
2. yoshi k n ji h ch.
3. yoshi w q zhnggu w ji xux hny.

Page 174 of 265


()

If it snows (the ski resort) will open for business.

rgu xixu (huxu chng) ji kifng.

If you were married, you would
know (understand).

rgu n jihn len ji zhdo le.


()

If I had money, ( I ) would go traveling.

yosh w yu qin dehu (w) ji q lyu.

1.

2.

3.

1.
If you are 18 years old, you may participate.
2.
If you would like to drink coffee, we will go to a coffee shop.
3.
If you have time, give me a call.

1.
yoshi n jnnin sh b su dehun ji ky cnji.
2.
yoshi n xing h kfi dehuwmen ji q kfidin.
3.
yoshi n yu shjin dehuji gi w d dinhu.


()

nmen du q dehu (w) ji q.
If you all go, I will go.

1.

2.

3.

Page 175 of 265

1.
If the weather is good, we go to the Great Wall.
2.
If you have time, give me a call.
3.
If you would like to drink coffee, we will go to a coffee shop.

1. tinq ho dehu wmen ji q chngchng.
2.
yu shjin dehuji gi w d dinhu.
3.
n xing h kfi dehuwmen ji q kfidin.

()

If it snows (the ski resort) will open for business.

rgu xixu dehu (huxu chng) ji kifng.

Then
In sentence patterns 1,2 and 3; is used to express a time relationship between two
conditions, events or actions in which

a) one condition, event or action immediately follows another - "as soon as"
b) one condition, event or action follows another in a relatively early time frame.

1. action, event or conditon action, event or condition

condition
condition
2. subject event

event

action
action

condition
condition
3. event subject

event
action
action

In sentence pattern 4, (ci) is used to express a time relationship between two
events or actions in which one follows another after a relatively long time or to
indicate a single event takes place in a relatively late time frame.

4. action or event action or event

In sentence pattern 5, (xin) is placed before the first of two things that happen in
succession. (rn hu) is placed before the second thing that happens. There is no
length of time implied. Sometimes (xin) is not necessary.
Page 176 of 265

5. subjectaction or eventaction or event

6. action or eventaction or event


1.

(immediately)
2.

(immediately)
3.

(immediately)
4.

(relatively early)
5.

(relatively early)
6.

(relatively early)

1.
She will finish watching the movie then she will return home.
2.
He gets off work, then he goes to the library.
3.
He ate, then he watched a movie.
4.
He was five years old when he started going to school.
5.
(It is) September, it is snowing.
6.
He starts work at five in the morning.

1.
t knwn dinyngji hu ji.
2. t xi le bn ji q tshgun.
3. t ch le fn ji kn dinyng le.
4. t w su ji shngxu le.
5. ji yu ji xixu le.
6. t zoshng wdinzhng ji shngbn.

2. subject condition / event / action action or event

w y xibn ji knjin le t. I saw him right after I got off work.

1.

2.

1.
As soon as I arrive in China, I will go to see my old friend.
2.
Right after they got out of the car, they saw their teacher.

1. w y do zhnggu ji q kn wde lo pngyou.
Page 177 of 265

2. tmen y xich ji knjin le tmen de losh.

3. condition / event / action subject action or event

y do zhnggu w ji q kn wde lo pngyou.

As soon as I arrive in China, I will go to see my old friend.

1.

2.

1. It is cold, I will wear a coat.
2. They got out of the car then saw their friend.

1. tinq y lng w ji chun dy.
2. y xich tmen ji kn jin le tmen de losh.

Note: (ju) is sometimes used to indicate emphasis, not a time relationship.
t ji sh Wng losh. He is Teacher Wang.


1. (relatively long)
2. (relatively long)
3. (relatively late)

1. She will go home after the movie.
2. He finishes dinner and then goes to work.
3. He gets off work at nine in the evening.
4. Its December and it is snowing.
5. He was 50 and then he got married.

1. t knwn dinyng ci hu ji.
2. t chwnfn ci q shngbn.
3. t wnshng ji dinzhng ci xibn.
4. shryu ci xixu.
5. t wsh su ci jihn.

Page 178 of 265

5. subject action or event action or event

First he bought a book, then bought two pens.

t xin mi le y bn sh, rnhu mi le ling zh b.

1.
,
2.
,
3.
,

1.
We will first go to Beijing, then go to Shanghai.
2.
We will watch a movie and then go home.
3.
You do your homework and then watch TV.

1.
tmen xin q Bijngrnhu q Shnghi.
2. wmen xin kn dinyng, rnhu huji.
3. n xin xi zuy, rnhu kn dinsh.


He bought a book then bought two pens.

t mi le y bn sh rnhu mi le ling zh b.

1.

2.
,
3.
,

1.
He will first go to Beijing, then will go to Shanghai.
2.
We will watch a movie and then go home.
3.
You do your homework and then watch TV.

1.
tmen q Bijngrnhu q Shnghi.
2. wmen kn dinyng, rnhu hu ji.
3. n xi zuy, rnhu kn dinsh.

Page 179 of 265

Don't / Other / But / Still ( / - / / )

Don't ( )
(bi) is used to make commands and statements that mean "don't". (bi) is not
used in sentences that express I dont. When expressing I do not , (b) is used.

1. Please, don't go.
2. You had better not go to that place.
3. Don't disturb him.
4. He is studying, don't disturb him.

1. qng n bi zu.
2. nmen zuho bi q n g dfang.
3. bi dro t.
4. t zi dshbi dro t.

Other ( / )
(bi de) or (bi) are used to express "other", in the context of "any other".
(lng wi) or (ling wi de) are used to express "other" in the context of
"besides" or "in addition to".

1.
2.

1.
Teacher Wang is the only one in the classroom, there is no one else.
2.
I don't like this article of clothing, the other one is too expensive.

1.
jiosh l zh yu Wng losh miyu bi rn
2.
w b xhuan zh jin yfulngwi de n jin ti gu

But ( )
1.

2.

1.
He would like to study English but he has no time.
2.
This desk is good, but too expensive.

1. t xing xux yngy dnsh miyu shjin.
2.
zh zhng zhuz hn hodnsh ti gu.

Page 180 of 265

Still / Yet / Also / (emphasis) ( )
There are many ways that (hi) is used. The examples below illustrate three ways
that it is commonly used - "still / yet" (sentences 1, 2), "also" (sentences 3, 4) and it
can be added for emphasis in questions (sentence 5).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.
Nine o'clock, Little Wang is still reading.
2.
Already September, yet it is hot.
3.
He speaks Chinese and also speaks English.
4.
We went to the Great Wall and went to the Forbidden City too.
5.
It is colder here than it is there.

1. jiudin lexio Wng hi zi knsh
2. yjng jiyu letin hi zhme r.
3. t hu shu zhngwnhi hu shu yngy.
4. wmen q le chngchnghi q le ggng.
5. zhr b nr hi lng

Page 181 of 265

Unit 27
Before / After / While / When
This unit introduces how express time relationships between events or actions.

New Words
1.

b si
match, competition
2.

y hu
after
3.

y qin
before
4.

ybin...ybin
while (two actions occurring
at the same time)
5.

zh hu
after
6.

zh qin
before

In the following examples (y qin) and (zh qin) are interchangeable and
(y hu) is interchangeable with (zh hu).

BEFORE
In this sentence pattern, the sentence starts with a phrase that indicates a length of
time, a point in time or an event. The action in the sentence happens prior to that.

1. Two hours ago, I ate dinner.
2.

Before I ate dinner, I went to the
store.
3.

Before the meeting, we will discuss
the matter.
4. I will eat dinner before 6 pm.
5.

We will have a meeting before the
game.

1. ling ge xiosh yqin w ch wnfn le.
2. chfn yqin w q shngdin le.
3. kihu yqin wmen toln zh jin sh.
4. lidinzhng yqin w yo ch wnfn.
5. bsi yqin wmen yo kihu.

AFTER
In this sentence pattern, the beginning of the sentence is a phrase that indicates a
length of time, a point in time or an event. The action in the sentence happens after
that.

1.

I will have class in 2 hours.
2.

After the meeting, we will discuss
the matter.
3.

I will eat dinner after 6 pm.
Page 182 of 265

4.

We will eat dinner after the game.
5.

After work yesterday, I watched a
movie.
6.

After I ate dinner, I went to the
store.
7.

After the meeting we discussed
the matter.
8.

We ate dinner after 6 pm.

1. ling ge xiosh yhu w yo shngk.
2. kihu yhu wmen yo toln zh jin sh.
3. li dinzhng yhu w yo ch wnfn.
4. bsi yhu wmen yo ch wnfn.
5. zutin xibn yhu wmen kn dinyng le.
6. chfn yhu w q shngdin le.
7. kihu yhu wmen toln zh jin sh le.
8. li dinzhng yhu w ch wnfn le.

WHILE
This sentence pattern is used to express when the subject is doing two actions at one
time.

subject action action

I eat dinner while I watch television.

w ybin ch wnfn ybin kn dinsh.

1.

I read while I listen to music.
2.

I listen to music while I write letters.
3.

He drinks tea while he watches television.

1.
w ybin kn shybin tng ynyu.
2.
w ybin tng ynyuybin xi xn.
3.
t ybin h chybin kn dinsh.

Page 183 of 265

WHEN / WHILE
This sentence patterns are used to express when something happens, (dng) is
optional.

event event

While I am reading, he is watching TV.

dng w kn sh deshhou t zi kn dinsh.

1.

2.

1.
When he was in England, he bought a computer.
2.
When I was in Beijing, I spoke Chinese everyday.

1. t zi ynggu deshhou mi le y ti dinno.
2. w zi Bijng deshhou mitin shu hny.

Questions
questions
1.

Did you eat dinner two hours ago?
2.

Will you eat dinner in 2 hours?
3.

Do you read while you listen to
music?
4.

When you were in Beijing, did
you speak Chinese everyday?

1.
ling ge xiosh yqin n ch wnfn le ma
2.
ling ge xiosh yhu n yo ch wnfn ma
3.
n ybin kn shybin tng ynyu ma
4.
n zi Bijng deshhou mitin shu hny ma

1.
?
When will you eat dinner?
2.

When you were in Beijing, what did
you do?

1. n shnme shhou xing ch wnfn?
2.
dng n zi Bijng deshhou zu shnme

Page 184 of 265

Unit 28
Repetition of Actions
(zi) and (yu)
This unit introduces how to express repetition of actions and events that happen in
succession.

New Words
1.

n jng
quiet
2.

d q
area
3.

fn gun
restaurant
4.

ho ch
delicious
5.

hun jng
environment
6.

j
extremely
7.

ji gu
outcome, result
8.

j t
guitar
9.

li l
fluent
10.

nn gu
feel sad, grieved
11.

tn
play a stringed musical instrument
with ones fingers, pluck a string
12.

wi gu
foreign country
13.

xi
repair
14.

yu
(1) indicates a repetition of an action
(2) indicates a succession of actions
15. yu.yu
indicates two actions that happen in
the same time period
16.

zi
(1) indicates a repetition of an action
(2) Indicates a continuation
(zi) and (yu)
The adverbs (zi) and (yu) both indicate the repetition of an action. (zi) is
used to denote an action or state of affairs which has not been repeated yet and
(yu) is used when the repetition has already occurred.

1.

2.

3.

1.
He went to the library today, he said that he would go to the library tomorrow.
2.
He came yesterday, he came again today.
3.
He didnt come yesterday, he wont come tomorrow.
Page 185 of 265

1. t jntin q tshgun let shu mngtin zi q
2. t zutin li lejntin yu li le
3. t zutin mi lijntin yu mi li

(yu) is used to indicate that two actions happen in succession
1.
,
2.

1. This TV was repaired once last year, this year it was repaired again, the result is
that it still isnt fixed.
2. He studied three years of Chinese at university and then studied three years of
French.

1.
zh g dinsh q nin xu le y cjn nin yu xi le y c
jigu hi sh mi yu xi ho
2. t zi dxu xu le s nin zhngwn yu xu le
sn nin fwn

The difference between and
(ybinybin) is used to express doing two or more actions at the
same time while (yuyu) is used to express two actions that happen
in the same time period. For example, if two people were walking together talking
you would say, (ybin zu ybin shu) but you would not say
(yu zu yu shu). If a person had cried and laughed in the same time frame
you could say (yu k yu xio) but you would not say
(ybin k ybin xio).

1.

2.

3.

4.

1. Mrs. Wang cooks dinner while chit chatting with the guests.
2. He plays guitar, sings and dances at the same time.
3. The child watches TV while eating an apple.
4. Mr. Wang drinks coffee while reading the newspaper.

1. Wng titi ybin zu fn ybin gn krn liotin
2. t ybin tn jt ybin chngg ybin tiow
3. hizi ybin kn dinsh ybin ch pnggu
Page 186 of 265

4. Wng xinshng ybin h kfi ybin knbo

may be used to express two situations or characteristics that occur at
the same time

1.

2.
,
3.
,
4.

5.
,
6.

1. This restaurants food is both delicious and cheap.
2. The students are very happy, they are both singing and dancing.
3. He is going abroad to study, he is both happy and sad.
4. He speaks Chinese both clearly and fluently.
5. This coat is both expensive and ugly.
6. This neighborhood is both quite and clean.

1. zh ji fngun de ci yu hoch yu pinyi
2. xushngmen goxng j leyu chng yu tio
3. t q wigu xuxyu goxng yu nngu
4. t shu d hny, yu qngchu yu lil
5. zh g dy, yu gu yu nnkn
6. zh g dq de hunjng yu njng yu pioliang

(zi) may also indicate a continuation of actions. For instance, if someone were
going out for little while they may say:

I will go to the library and then go to the supermarket.

w xin q tshgun rnhu zi q chosh

Page 187 of 265

Unit 29
From / To / With
This unit introduces some commonly used prepositions that are used when talking
about distances and time as well as how to use the preposition "with".

New Words
1.

bn gun
hotel
2.

cng
from (a place or time)
3.

cho sh
supermarket, grocery store
4.

d
play (badminton, basketball, ping
pong)
5.

fng ji
vacation
6.

f jn
nearby
7.

gn
with, and
8.

gng l
kilometer
9.

Gung zhu
a city in China
10.

hu yun bn gun
Garden Hotel
11.

hu y sh
meeting room
12.

j chng
airport
13.

jio xu lu
teaching building
14.

jn
near
15.

ki sh
begin, start
16.

l
from (a place)
17.

shu d
capital
18.

y mo qi
badminton
19.

y yn
language
20.

yun
far

From
(cng) is a preposition that means from. It can be used when stating a starting
point from a place as well as a starting point in time.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1. I will go from here to your home.
Page 188 of 265

2. I will go from the school to the post office.
3. We start a vacation tomorrow.
4. I work from 10 o'clock in the morning to 5 o'clock in the afternoon.
5. He traveled in China from January of last year to May of this year.

1. w cng zhr q nde ji.
2. w cng xuxio q yuj.
3. wmen cng mngtin kish fngji.
4. wmen cng shngw shdinzhng gngzu do xiw
wdinzhng.
5. t cng qnin yyu do jnnin wyu zi zhnggu
lyu.

(l) means from and is used when expressing exact distance measurements as
well as relative terms such as far and near.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.
The Garden Hotel isn't too far from my home.
2.
It is a long way from Beijing to Guangzhou.
3.
Our school is two kilometers from the hospital.
4.
The teaching building isn't far from the library.
5.
It is a long way from Beijing Language Institute to the Capitol Airport.

1. huyun bngun l wde ji b ti yun.
2. Bijng l Gungzhu hn yun.
3. wmen xuxio l yyun ling gngl.
4. jioxulu l tshgun b ti yun.
5. Bijng yyn xuyun l shud jchng hn yun.

(gn) is used to indicate that people are engaged in something together.

person person action or event

My Chinese friend and I go dancing together.

Page 189 of 265

w gn zhnggu pngyou yq q tiow.

1.

I will go with him to school.
2.

I play badminton with my dad.

1. w gn t yq q xuxio.
2. w gn wde bba yq d ymoqi.

(f jn) (nearby) is a noun and may be used as a subject, object or attributive
modifier.

1.

(subject)
2.

(subject)
3.

(object)
4.

(attributive modifier)

1. There is a supermarket nearby.
2. Nearby my home is a supermarket.
3. That supermarket is nearby.
4. I have been to all the nearby supermarkets.

1.
fjn yu y g chosh
2.
w ji fjn yu y g chosh
3.
n g chosh ju zi fjn
4.
fjn de chosh w du q gu le

(jn) (near) is an adjective and is usually expressed by saying (hn jn).

Question: Which supermarket did you going to?
n q le n g chosh

Answer 1:

I went to a supermarket that is
nearby.

w q le fjn de chosh

Answer 2:

I went to the supermarket
near my home.

w q le l w ji hn jn de chosh

Page 190 of 265

Unit 30
Simple Compliment of Direction ( and )
and
Compound Compliment of Direction
This first part of this unit shows how (li) and (q) are used to compliment
verbs to show the direction of the action in a sentence. The second half of the unit
introduces how (li) and (q) are combined with other verbs to form compound
compliments of direction which are used to indicate the direction of an action.

New Words
1.

di
to take, bring, carry
2.

gu
come or go across, to cross
3.

hur
flower
4.

jn
enter
5.

p
climb
6.

p ji
beer
7.

png
bottle (of something)
8.

png zi
bottle (noun)
9.

q
rise
10.

shn
mountain
11.

sh
measure word meaning a bunch (of
flowers)
12. yn hng bank

Simple Compliment of Direction ( and )
When (li) and (q) are added to the predicate to show direction, they are called
"simple compliments of direction". They are used to show the direction in which the
action proceeds. (q) is used to show the direction of the action is proceeding away
from the speaker, (li) is used to show that it is proceeding toward the speaker. If
the object is a location, (li) and (q) must go after the object. If the object is a
thing, (li) and (q) may either go before the object or after the object.
Sentences 1a - 6a show how to use auxiliary verbs in these sentences. Sentences 1b
6b show how (le) is used in these sentences.

subject verb object ( or )
(object is a location)
1.

We will go to the bank.
2.

They will come to the
bank.
1a.
We will go to the bank.
2a.

They will come to the
bank.
Page 191 of 265

1b.

They went to the bank.
2b.

They came to the bank.

subject verb ( or ) object
(object is not a location)
3.

We will take a bunch of
flowers.
4.

We will bring a bunch of
flowers.

3a.

flowers.
4a.

We will bring a bunch
of flowers.

3b.

We took a bunch of
flowers.
4b.

We brought a bunch of
flowers.

subject verb (object) ( or )
(object is not a location)
5.

flowers.
6.

flowers.
5a.

flowers.
6a.

flowers.
5b.

We took a bunch of
flowers.
6b.

We brought a bunch of
flowers.

1. wmen do ynhng q.
2. tmen do ynhng li.
3. wmen di q y sh hur.
4. wmen di li y sh hur.
5. wmen di y sh hur q
6. wmen di y sh hur li .

Page 192 of 265

Compound Compliment of Direction
(q) and (li) are used with other verbs to form two character compound
compliments of direction that indicate the direction of another verbs action. For
instance, to say the children run up to me; the verb (po) is complimented with
(shng lai). To say the the children ran away from me; the verb (po) is
complimented with (xi lai). It is possible to use compound compliments of
direction alone, without other verbs, but this is not common. (example sentence 24).

Verbs that express direction:

shng xi jn ch hu gu q
go up/on go out/down enter exit return pass rise

When (q) and (li) are combined with the above verbs, that also indicate
direction, they form compound compliments of directions:

shng li come up

jn li come in

shng q go up

jn q go in

xi li come down

ch li come out

xi q go down

ch q go out

hu li come back

q li start and continue

hu q go back

gu li come across

gu q go across

If the object is a location, then the object (location) goes between the two characters
of the compound compliment. For example, (p shn) is a verb-object phrase,
the verb is (p) (to climb) and the object is (shn) (mountain). The object must
go directly before (li) or (q). In the example sentence below, the speaker is on
the mountain above them.

come up They came up the mountain.

tmen p shng shn li le.

If the object is not a location, the object may go either before or after or . In
these examples, the object is (y png pji) which means "one bottle of
beer".
Page 193 of 265

come out 1.

object before

2.

object after

Mr. Wang fetched a bottle of beer.

1. Wng xinshng n ch y png pji li.
2. Wng xinshng n chlai y png pji.

If there is no object, the compound compliment follows the verb. In the sentence
below (zh) is the verb.

go down /
continue

I will continue to
live in Beijing.

w hi yo zi Bijng zh xiq.

Example Sentences
The following section provides further examples of how to use compound
compliments of direction. The sentence numbers are in parenthesis.

(1-4)

(15-17)
(29-34)
(45-46)

(5-8)

(18-21)
(35-38)

(9-12)

(22-25)
(39-42)

(13-14)

(26-28)
(43-44)

Supplemental Words
1.

bn
move (things)
2.

din xn
a snack
3.

dio
fall, drop
4.

fi
fly
5.

fng zheng
kite
6.

f qn
father
7.

gng
just (now)
8.

hi
sea
9.

j
mail (verb)
10.

k fi gun
coffee shop
11.

l w
gift
12.

m shng
immediately
13.

mo
cat
Page 194 of 265

14.

m qn
mother
15.

ti yng
sun
16.

tng
stop
In the Glossary, these words are listed as Unit 30S.

When using directional compliments, in some cases, it is important to understand
where the speaker is. In the sentences below, the speaker's position is shown in
parenthesis.
Compound Compliment Sentences

come up

speakers
location
1.

They climbed the mountain. (on the mountain)
2.

The children ran up.
(above the children)
3.

He came upstairs. (upstairs)
4.

He came up. (walking)
(above the walking
person)

1. tmen p shng shn li le.
2. hizmen po shngli le.
3. t shng lu li le.
4. t zu shngli le.

go down

speakers
location
5.

They went upstairs. (downstairs)
6.

The cat climbed the tree.

7.

The kite flew up in the
sky.

8.

He ran up. (higher place than the
runner)

5. tmen zu shng lu q le.
6. mo p shng sh q le.
7. fngzheng fi shng tin q le.
8. t po shngq le.

Page 195 of 265

come down

speakers
location
9.
We wrote down what

he said.

10.

All the cars stopped.

11.

He came downstairs
to make a call.
(downstairs)
12.

He came downstairs. (downstairs)

9. t shu de hu wmen xi xili le.
10. ch du tng xili le.
11. t zu xi lu li d dinhu le.
12. t zu xi lu li le.

go down / continue

speakers
location
13.

He went downstairs to
buy a snack.
(upstairs)
14.

He drove down from
here.
(higher place
than the driver)

13. t zu xi lu q mi dinxn.
14. cng zhr ki xiq.

come in

speakers
location
15.

The students came in the
classroom.
(inside the
classroom)
16.
The cars may not drive

into the park.
(inside the
park)
17.

Children may not come
in.
(here)

15. xushngmen zu jn jiosh li le.
16. qch b nng ki jn gngyun l li.
17. xio hi b nng jnli.

Page 196 of 265

go in

speakers
location
18.

Cars drive into the gate. (outside the
gate)
19.

Move everything in. (outside)
20.
They went into the

office.
(outside the
office)
21.

The puppy fell into the
river.

18. qch ki jn dmn q le.
19. dngxi du bn jnq le.
20. tmen zu jn bngngsh q le.
21. xiogu dio jn h l q le.

come out

speakers
location
22.

Mr. Wang fetched a
beer.

23.

He came out. (outside)
24.

The sun comes up in
the east.

25.

There is a car
driving out of the
gate.
(outside the
gate)

22. Wng xinshng n chli y png pji.
23. t cng lbin zu chli le.
24. tiyng cng dngbin chli.
25. cng dmn lki chli y ling qch.

go out

speakers
location
26.

The children ran out. (inside)
27. I just mailed a letter.
28.
They came out of the

coffee shop.

26. hizmen po chq le.
27. w gng j chq y fng xn.
28. tmen cng kfigun zu le chq.

Page 197 of 265

return , come

speakers
location
29.

The children ran home from
school.

30.

He bought a book and
returned.
(here)
31.

Father brought many gifts
back.
(here)
32.

Mother bought a lot of food
and returned.
(here)
33.

Mother bought a lot of food
and returned.
(here)
34.
Dad brought many gifts

back.
(here)

29. t cng xuxio po hu ji li le.
30. t mi hulai y bn sh.
31. fqn di huli b sho lw.
32. mqn mi hu hn du ci li.
33. mqn mi hn du ci huli.
34. bb di huli le b sho lw.

return go
speakers
location
35.

He ran back to school
from home.

36.
,

After class, I will run
back to the dormitory.
(in a classroom)
37.

They took back a lot of
books.

38.

After class,
immediately go home.
(not at home)

35. t cng ji po hu xuxio q le.
36.
xik yhuw yo po hu ssh q.
37. tmen di huq hn du sh.
38.
xik yhumshng hu ji q.

Page 198 of 265

come across

speakers
location
39.

The came across. (here)
40.

There is a taxi coming
towards us.

41.

There is a taxi coming
towards us.

42.

There is a person walking
toward me.

39. tmen zu guli le.
40. qinmin ki guli y ling chzch.
41. qinmin ki gu y ling chzch li.
42. dumin zu guli y g rn.

go across

43.

The car is driving away.

44.

The plane is flying away.

43. qch ki gu q le.
44. fij fi gu q le.

start and continue something

45.

The child can sit up.

46.

The kite flew up.

47.

Write (something) down.

48.

Put (something) away

49.

Put (something) away

50.

Think (something) up

45. xiohi nng zu qli le.
46. fngzheng fi qli le.
47. xi xili
48. shu qli
49. fng qli
50. xing qli

Page 199 of 265

Unit 31
Durations of Actions
This unit shows how express how long ago something happened and how long actions
take.

New Words
1.

ba
softens a request
2.

dng
to become
3.

hu
use time, spend time
4.

k jin
break between classes
5.

lio
chit chat
6.

lio tin
chit chat
7.

pi du
to wait in line
8.

q chung
get up
9.

shr
affairs, matters
10.

Tinjn
a city near Beijing
11.

wn
late
12.

w fn
lunch
13.

xng
OK
14.

y hur
indicates a short time
15.

y xi
indicates a short time or casual manner
16.

y xir
indicates a short time or casual manner

Unit Summary
Section A the length of time from the time of occurrence of an action to the time of
speaking when the predicate cannot be a contiuous action.

Question: How long have you been married?
Answer: I have been married for 10 years.

Question: n jihn du chng sh jin le
Answer: w jihn sh nin le

Section B the duration of actions that happened in the past and are not occurring at
the time of speaking. (using a verb without an object)

Question:

How long were you out playing?
Answer:

I played for one day.

Page 200 of 265

Question: n wnr le du chng sh jin
Answer: w wnr le y tin

Section C the duration of actions that are occurring at the time of speaking (using
a verb without an object)

Question: How long have you been listening?
Answer: I have been listening for five minutes.

Question: n tng le du chng sh jin le
Answer: w tng le w fn zhng le

Section D the duration of actions that happened in the past and are not occurring at
the time of speaking (using a verb with an object).

Question: How long did you study Chinese?
Answer: I studied Chinese for two years.

Question: n xux zhngwn xu le du chng sh jin
Answer: w xux zhngwn xu le ling nin

Sentences that have personal pronouns as objects are also discussed in this section.

Section E the duration of actions that happened in the past and are not occurring at
the time of speaking (using a verb with an object). If the object is a
personal pronoun, this pattern may not be used.

Question: How long did you study Chinese?
Answer: I studied Chinese for two years.

Question: n xu le du chng sh jindezhngwn
Answer: w xu le ling nindezhngwn

Section F the duration of reoccurring actions (using a verb with an object)

Question:

How long do you eat lunch
everyday?
Answer:

I eat lunch for one hour a day.

Question: n mi tin ch w fn ch du chng sh jin
Answer: w mi tin ch w fn ch y g xio sh
Page 201 of 265

Section F1 the duration of reoccurring actions (using a verb with an object)

Question:
()
How long do you eat lunch
everyday?
Answer:
()
I eat lunch for one hour a day.

Question: n mi tin ch du chng sh jindew fn
Answer: w mi tin ch y g xio shdew fn

Section G the duration of reoccurring actions (using a verb without an object)

Question:

How long do you (read/watch) every day?
Answer:

I (read/watch) one hour a day.

Question: n mi tin kn du chng sh jin
Answer: w mi tin kn y g xio sh

Section H using auxiliary verbs in sentences that express the duration of actions
(using a verb without an object)

I will (read/watch) for one hour.

w yo kn y g xio sh

Section I using auxiliary verbs in sentences that express the duration of actions
(using a verb with an object)

I will (read/watch) for one hour.

w yo kn y g xio sh de din sh

Section J using expressions that mean a little while

using expressions that mean use time / take time

a little while use time / spend time / take time

y hur y xi y xir yng sh jin hu sh jin

Page 202 of 265

Section K Comparing lengths of time and making comparisons using earlier and
later.

1.
.
2.

1. Anna gets to the classroom five minutes earlier than Li Ming everyday.
2. Anna sleeps two hours less than Li Ming everyday.

1. mi tin nn b Lmng zo w fn zhng do jio sh
2. mi tin nn b Lmng sho shu ling g xio shjio

Section A - from the time of occurrence to the time of speaking
To show how long an actions or states last, time phrases are added to the predicate
after the object. If the predicate verb cant indicate a continuous action, the time
phrase indicates the period of time from the occurrence of the action to the time of
speaking and (le) is placed at the end of the sentence.

It has been two years since I left home.

subject verb object time phrase

w l ki ji ling nin le

I leave home two years

To form a question, place (du chng sh jin) in place of the time phrase.

1.
How long has it been since you came to

Beijing?
2.
I came to Beijing over two months ago.

1. n li Bijng du chng sh jin le
2. w li Bijng y g du yu le

3. How long has it been since you graduated?
4. I graduated two years ago.

3. n dxu by du chng sh jin le
4. w dxu by ling nin le

Page 203 of 265

In the remaining explanations in this unit, the verbs used can indicate continuous
actions.

Section B - the duration of actions that happened in the past and are not
occurring at the time of speaking. (using a verb without an object)
Generally, the sentence pattern below is used after the action is over so the action is
not occurring at the time of speaking. In the sentence pattern below, no object can be
included in the sentence. (le) is placed after the predicate verb and the time phrase
is placed at the end of the sentence.

I waited two hours.

subject verb time phrase

w dng le
ling g xiosh
I wait two hours

5. How long did he sleep?
6. He slept for six hours.

5.
t shu le du chng sh jin
6.
t shu le li g xiosh

To compare:
(t qchung sh w fn zhng le) (Section A)
means He has been out of bed for 15 minutes.
(t qchung le sh w fn zhng) (Section B)
means It took him 15 minutes to get up.

Section C - the duration of actions that are occurring at the time of speaking.
(using a verb without an object)
If the action is still going on at the time of speaking, (le) is placed after the verb
and (le) is also placed at the end of the sentences. In this sentence pattern, the verb
does not have an object.

I have waited two hours. (and I am still waiting)

subject verb time phrase

w dng le ling g xiosh le
I wait two hours

Page 204 of 265

In example questions 7 12 below, the action is still going on at the time of speaking.

7.

8.

7. How long has he been sleeping?
8. He has been sleeping for six hours. (and he is still sleeping)

7. t shu le duchng shjin le
8. t shu le li g xiosh le

9.

10.

9. How long have you been studying at this school?
10. I have been studying at this school for two years. (and continue to study)

9. n zi zh g xuxio xu le duchng shjin le
10. w zi zh g xuxio xu le ling nin le

11.
12.

11. How long have they been talking?
12. They have been talking for three hours. (and are still talking)

11. tmen lio le du chng sh jin le
12. tmen lio le sn g xiosh le

Section D - the duration of actions that happened in the past and are not
occurring at the time of speaking (using a verb with an object).
In the sentence pattern below the verb must have an object. The verb is repeated after
the object and (le) is placed after the second occurrence of the verb followed by the
time phrase at the end of the sentence. Generally, this sentence pattern is used after
the action is over so the action is not occurring at the time of speaking. In the sentence
below, the circumstances would tell the listener what specific vehicle (ch) refers
to, it could be a bus, taxi or a car.
Page 205 of 265

I waited for the car for two hours.
subject verb object verb time phrase

w dng ch dng le ling ge xiosh
I wait vehicle wait two hours

13. How long did you watch TV?
14.
We watched TV for two hours.

13. nmen kn dinsh kn le du chng sh jin
14. wmen kn dinsh kn le ling g xiosh

These patterns are used for names and personal pronouns.
(The sentence patterns in Section E may not be used for personal pronouns.)

15. How long did you wait for him?
16.
I waited for him one hour.

15. n dng t dng le duchng shjin
16. w dng t dng le y g xiosh

This sentence pattern is used after the action is over so the action is not occurring at
the time of speaking.

17. How long did you wait for him?
18.
I waited for him one hour.

17. n dng t dng le duchng shjin
18. w dng t le y g xiosh

This sentence pattern indicates that the action is not finished so the action is still
occurring at the time of speaking. The first occurance of (le) is optional.

19.
()
How long have you been waiting for
him?
20.
()
I have been waiting for him for one
hour.
19. n dng (le) t duchng shjin le
20. w dng (le) t dng y g xiosh le

Page 206 of 265

Section E - the duration of actions that happened in the past and are not
occurring at the time of speaking (using a verb with an object.)
In the sentence pattern below the verb must have an object. (le) is placed directly
after the verb followed by the time phrase indicating the duration of the action with
the object at the end of the sentence. (de) may be placed just before the object, but
it does not have to be included in the sentence, it is optional. Generally this sentence
pattern is used after the action is over so the action is not occurring at the time of
speaking. This pattern is not used with personal pronouns or names.

I waited for the car for two hours.

subject verb time phrase () object
()
w dng le ling g xiosh
()
ch
I wait two hours car

15. ()
16. ()

15. How long did you watch TV?
16. We watched TV for two hours.

15. nmen kn le du chng sh jin (de) dinsh
16. wmen kn le ling g xiosh (de) dinsh

Section F - the duration of reoccurring actions (using a verb with an object)
To express the duration of reoccurring actions, (le) is not used. In the sentence
pattern below, the verb must have an object.

We have three weeks of vacation every year.

subject time phrase verb object verb time phrase

wmen mi nin fng ji fng sn g xngq
We every year take vacation take three weeks

time phrase subject verb object verb time phrase

mi nin wmen fng ji fng sn g xngq
Every year we take vacation take three weeks

Page 207 of 265

17a.

17b.

18.

17 a/b. How much vacation time do you get every year?
18. We have three weeks of vacation every year.

17a.
mi nin nmen fng ji fng du chng sh jin
17b.
nmen mi nin fng ji fng du chng sh jin
18.
wmen mi nin fng ji fng sn g xngq

19.
20.

19. How much time do you sleep everyday?
20. I sleep eight hours everyday.

19.
n mi tin shu jio shu du chng sh jin
20.
mi tin w shu jio shu b g xiosh

Section F1 - the duration of reoccurring actions (using a verb with an object)
To express the duration of reoccurring actions, using the sentence pattern below, the
time phrases are placed between the verb and the object. (le) is not used and (de)
is optional.
We have three weeks of vacation every year.

time phrase subject verb time phrase () object
()
mi nin wmen fng sn g xngq ji
Every year we take three weeks vacation

subject time phrase verb time phrase () object
()
wmen mi nin fng sn g xngq ji
We every year take three weeks vacation

21.
()
22.
()

Page 208 of 265

21. mi nin nmen fng du chng sh jin (de) ji
22. wmen mi nin fang sn g xngq (de) ji

21. How much vacation time do you get every year?
22. We have three weeks of vacation every year.

23.

24.

23. How much time do you sleep everyday?
24. I sleep eight hours everyday.

23. n mitin shu du chng sh jin (de) jio
24. w mitin shub g xiosh (de) jio

Section G - the duration of reoccurring actions (using a verb without an object)
If the verb does not require an object, the example below may be used to express the
duration of reoccurring actions.

I sleep six hours everyday.

subject time phrase verb time phrase

w mitin shu li g xiosh
I everyday sleep six hours

You cannot use the sentence pattern above if the verb has an object. For example, you
cannot say ? (n mitin shujio duchng shjin)

Section H - Using auxiliary verbs in sentences that express the duration of
actions (using a verb without an object)
To express the duration of an action that will happen in the future, the sentence
patterns below may be used. In the example below, (wnr) , which literally
means to play is the general term Chinese people commonly use to express relaxing
and having fun in their leisure time. It is also used to express the action of playing,
like when children play. Either (wn) or (wnr) may be used.
Page 209 of 265

We are going to go out and have some fun for a day.

subject auxiliary verb verb time phrase

wmen yo wnr y tin
We will play one day

25.

26.

27.

25. We will play for an hour.
26. I will sleep for two hours.
27. I will write for one hour.

25. wmen hu d y g xiosh
26. w hu shu ling g xiosh
27. w hu xi y g xiosh
*In sentence 25, (d) means to play i.e., (d ln qu) (to play basketball)
(d pngpng qu) (to play ping pong).

Section I - Using auxiliary verbs in sentences that express the duration of actions
(using a verb with an object)

We are going to play basketball for an hour.

subject auxiliary verb verb time phrase () object
()
wmen hu d y g xiosh (de) ln qi
We will play an hour basketball

28.
()
29.
()

28. I will write letters for an hour.
29. I will do homework for two hours and then eat.

28. w hu xi y g xiosh (de) xn
29. w hu zu ling g xiosh (de) zuy rnhu ch fn

Page 210 of 265

Section J using using expressions that mean a little while
using expressions that mean use time / take time

a little while use time / spend time / take time

y hur y xi y xir yng sh jin hu sh jin

In all the examples in this unit, the time phrases used to express the duration of
actions have been definite time lengths. To express a little while, (y hur) is
used in the same way as the time phrases.

30.

31.

32.

33.

30. First we will rest a while and then do (our) homework.
31. We will play a while and then go home.
32. We talked a while during the break between classes.
33. My dad watches TV a while before he eats dinner everyday.

30.
wmen xin xixi yhur rnhu zu zuy
31.
wmen hu wn yhur rnhu hu ji
32.
wmen zi kjin lio le yhur
33.
w bba mi tin ch fn yqin kn yhur dinsh

Note:
To express rest a while you say : (xi yhur hur)

To express sleep a while you say : (shu yhur jio)

1.
2.
3.
4.

In sentence 2, (shu w jio) means afternoon nap. In sentence 4, (zho)
is used as a verb compliment of potentiality that means to fall asleep.

1. sleep I go to bed at 10 o'clock every day.
2. nap I take a nap at 4 o'clock ever day.
3. sleep a while I will sleep a little while.
4. not sleep I couldn't sleep last night.
Page 211 of 265

1. shu jio
w mitin sh din shu jio
2. shu w jio
w mitin s din shu w jio
3. shu yhur jio
w yo shu yhur jio
4. shu b zho
w zutin wnshng shu b zho

To express a very short time, (y xi) or (y xir) are used in the same
way as the time phrases. When using these terms, it also carries the meaning that that
the thing being done isnt of great importance, that something is done in a casual
manner. For instance, if something interesting came on TV, to draw another persons
attention to the TV one might say ! (kn y xi!). In sentence 35 below,
(mi shr) means its nothing and the modal particle (ba) is used to soften the
tone of the sentence.

34.

35.

34. Can I use your dictionary for a moment?
35. No problem, use it!

34. yng yxi nde cdinxng ma
35. mi shryng ba

To express using or spending time, (yng) (hu) are used. Both sentences
below mean I spend one hour cooking dinner everyday.

36.

37.

36. mitin w yng y g xiosh zu wnfn
37. mitin w hu y g xiosh zu wnfn

To make a question, (duchng shjin) goes in the place of the time phrase.
Both questions below mean How much time do you spend cooking dinner
everyday?

38.

39.

Page 212 of 265

38. mitin n yng duchng shjin zu wnfn
39. mitin n hu duchng shjin zu wnfn

40.

41.

40. How long does it take to go by train from Beijing to Tianjin?
41. It takes half an hour to go from Beijing to Tianjin by train.

40. cng Bijng zu hu ch do Tinjn yng
duchng shjin
41. cng Bijng zu hu ch do Tinjn hu
bn g xiosh

Example Sentences
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1. How long did you sleep last night?
2. I slept for six hours.
3. How long did they talk yesterday?
4. They talked for three hours.
5. They have been talking for three hours. (they are still talking)

1. n zutin wnshng shu le duchng shjin
2. w shu le li g xiosh
3. zutin tmen lio le duchng shjin
4. tmen liotin lio le sn g xiosh
5. tmen lio le sn g xiosh le

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Page 213 of 265

6. How long do you workout each day?
7. I workout one hour a day.
8. He was sick for one month and three days.
9. I have already been in China for over a month.
10. It is 12:30 pm the students have already been out of class for half an hour.

6.
n mitin dunlin du chng sh jin
7.
w mi tin dunlin y g xiosh
8.
t bng le y g yu lng sn tin
9.
w li zhnggu y jng y g du yu le
10.
xin zi sh sh r din bn tngxumen
yjng xik bn g xiosh le

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

11. How long did he ride?
12. How long did he ride (his) bicycle?
13. He rode for four hours.
14. He rode his bicycle for four hours.
15. He has been riding his bicycle for twenty minutes. (and is still riding)

11. t q le duchng shjin
12. t q zxngch q le duchng shjin
13. t q le s g xiosh
14. t q le s g xiosh zxngch
15. t q zxngch q le r sh fn zhng le

16.
,
17.
,
18.

19.

20.

16. How long is the flight from Beijing to Shanghai?
17. The flight from Beijing to Shanghai is three hours.
Page 214 of 265

18. How long did he read the newspaper?
19. He read the newspaper for half an hour.
20. He read the newspaper for half an hour.

16. cng Bijng do Shnghi, zu duchng shjin de fij
17. cng Bijng do Shnghi, zu sn g xiosh de fij
18. t kn le du chng sh jin de bozh
19. t kn bozh kn le bn g xiosh
20. t kn le bn g xiosh de bozh

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

(In example number 25, does not mean good, it indicates extreme)

21. She talked on the phone for 30 minutes.
22. She has been in university for three years. (and still is)
23. She has been a teacher for four years. (and still is)
24. They have been married for three years. (and still are)
25 I waited for a taxi (or bus) for a long time.

21. t d le sn sh fn zhng de dinhu
22. t shng le sn nin d xu le
23. t dng lo sh s nin le
24. tmen ji hn sn nin le
25 w dng ch dng le ho chng sh jin

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

26. How long does it take to go from your home to your office by bicycle?
27. It takes half an hour to go from my home to the office.
28. He spends a lot of time watching TV.
29. I spend a lot of time reading my email.
30. I waited in line for an hour.
Page 215 of 265

26. cng n ji q zxngch do bngngsh hu
du chng sh jin
27. cng w ji q zxngch do bngngsh yng
bn g xiosh
28. t hu hndu shjin kn dinsh
29. w hu hndu shjin kn dinz yujin
30 w hu le y g xiosh pidu

Section K 1. making comparisons using earlier and later
2. comparing lengths of time

These are the facts about when Anna and Li Ming granduated from university:

1.
1995
2.
2005

1. Anna graduated from university in 1995.
2. Li Ming graduated from university in 2005.

1. nn 1995 nin dxu by
2. Lmng 2005 nin dxu by

These are the statements of comparison about who graduated earlier and later:

3.
4.

3. Anna graduated from university 10 years earlier than Li Ming.
4. Li Ming graduated from university 10 years later than Anna.

3. nn b Lmng zo by sh nin
4. Lmng b nn wn by sh nin

These are the facts about when Anna and Li Ming go to bed and get up in the morning.

5. 12:00 , 6:00
6. 11:00 , 7:00

5. Anna goes to bed at 12 oclock and gets up at 6 oclock everyday.
6. Li Ming goes to bed at 11 oclock and gets up at 7 oclock everyday.
Page 216 of 265

5. nn mi tin 12:00 shu jio, 6:00 q chung
6. Lmng mi tin 11:00 shu jio, 7:00 q chung

These are comparisons about who gets up earlier and later:

7.

8.

7. Anna goes to bed one hour later and gets up one hour earlier than Li
Ming everyday.
8. Li Ming goes to bed one hour earlier and gets up one hour later than
Anna everyday.

7.
mi tin nn b Lmng wn shu jio y g xio shzo q
chung y g xiosh
8.
mi tin Lmng b nn zo shu jio y g xio sh wn q
chung y g xio sh

These are comparisons about who sleeps longer or sleeps less time:

9.

10.

9. Anna sleeps two hours less than Li Ming everyday.
10. Li Ming sleeps two hours more than Anna everyday.

9. mi tin nn b Lmng sho shu ling g xio shjio
10. mi tin Lmng b nn du shu ling g xio shjio

These are the facts about when Anna and Li Ming get to the classroom.

11.
7:50
12.
8:00

11. Anna gets to the classroom at 7:50 everyday.
12. Li Ming gets to the classroom at 8:00 everyday.

11. nn mitin 7:50 do jiosh
12. Lmng mitin 8:00 do jiosh
Page 217 of 265

These are comparisons about who gets to the classroom earlier and later:

13.
.
14.

13. Anna gets to the classroom five minutes earlier than Li Ming everyday.
14. Li Ming gets to the classroom five minutes later than Anna everyday.

13. mi tin nn b Lmng zo w fn zhng do jio sh
14. mitin Lmng b nn wn w fn zhng do jio sh

Page 218 of 265

Unit 32
Modifying Verbs ()
(the manner in which something is done)
This unit shows how to express the manner in which actions are done.

New Words
1.

ch f
set out
2.

j sh
in a timely manner
3.

ji ju
solve, resolve, settle
4.

jn
tightly
5.

jng l
manager
6.

k tng
living room
7

k
cry
8.

ln j
neighbor
9.

mn y
satisfy
10.

p
to lie face down
11.

r qng
cordially
12.

rn zhn
conscientious
13.

shu
hand
14.

sh fu
comfortable
15.

tu
head
16.

w
to hold
17.

xio
smile, laugh
18

yn yun
performer, actor
19.

zhe
adverbial modifier to show the
manner in which an action is done
20.

zu l
to walk down the street
Verb - (zhe)
Verbs are used with (zhe) to show the manner in which actions are done. In the
first example, (zhe) is used with the verb meaning to sit to show that the person
is sitting while reading. The second example shows how, (zhe) can be part of a
verb phrase to accomplish the same thing.

He sits to read. / He is sitting while reading.
subject verb
(to show manner)

t zu zhe kn sh
He sit read book
Page 219 of 265

He shook my hand, saying Thank you!

subject verb phrase
(to show manner)

t w zhe w de shu shu xi xi nn
He shaking my hand say thank you

In the example above, (w) literally means to hold, but in the context of the
example sentence, it means that the two people are shaking hands. In examples 6 and
7 below, (p) means to lie face down. In example 8, (tng) means to lie face
up. In sentence 3, ( y) means aunt and is a term of respect that children call
women or a young adult will address an older woman.

Example Sentences
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

1. yn yun zhn zhe chng g
2. t d zhe tu zu l
3. t xio zhe shu xi xi y
4. mma zi ktng l gn lnj h zhe ch liotinr
5. zh g hizi k zhe shuw de xiogu bng le
6. t xhun zi chung shng p zhe kn sh
7. xio mo zi chung ti shng p zhe shujio ne
8. bba zi chung shng tng zhe shujio ne

1. The performer stood and sang. / The performer stands and sings.
2. He walks / walked down the street with his head down.
3. He smiled and said, Thank you Auntie.
4. Mother is in the living room drinking coffee and chatting with a neighbor.
5. This child cried and said, My puppy is sick.
6. He likes to lie in bed and read.
7. The kitten is on lying on the window sill sleeping.
Page 220 of 265

8. Father is on the lying on the bed sleeping.

Adjectives that show the manner in which something is done.

Single syllable adjectives
Adjectives are placed before verbs to show the manner in which something is done.
Single syllable adjectives are placed directly before a verb with nothing in between.
Two syllable adjectives may be followed by (de) and then the verb, but (de) is
optional. In the example below, (zo) (early) shows the manner in which the verb
(ch f) (set out) happens.

They set out early.

subject adjective predicate verb completed action

tmen zo ch f le
They early set out

Sometimes (du) is used in this sentence pattern, in place of the adjective, to place
added emphasis on the verb. In the sentence, (n bx du tng)
(You need to listen.) (du) is used to add extra emphasis to the verb (tng).
(de) is not used in sentences that use (du).

Reduplicated Single Syllable Adjectives
AA - - Verb
Another way to add emphasis to an adjective, that modifies a verb, is to say the
adjective twice, this is called reduplication. When a single syllable adjective is
reduplicated, the second syllable is spoken in the nuetral tone and a retroflex r may
be used, for instance, both (zo zao) or (zo zaor) could be used to say
early. Putting (de) between the reduplicated adjective and the verb is optional.

They set out early.

subject
reduplicated
adjective
()
predicate
verb
completed
action
()
tmen zo zao de ch f le
They early set out

Two Syllable Adjectives
AB - (de) - Verb
When using two syllable adjectives, putting (de) between the adjective and the
verb is optional. However, some two syllable adjectives are also verbs, depending on
the context they are used in. When those adjectives are used, (de) must be used.
For instance, in the sentence (z xi d hn qngchu) (The writing is
Page 221 of 265

very clear.) (qng chu) is an adjective that means to be clear and easy to
understand. However, in the sentence (t zu
qngchu zh sh de qin yn hu gu) (He understands the matter thoroughly.),
(qngchu) is a verb that means to understand, to know . In this case, (de) must be
used to make it clear that (qng chu) is an adjective. To avoid grammar mistakes,
a speaker may use (de) with all two syllable adjectives.

They study conscientiously.

subject adjective predicate verb

tmen rn zhn de xu x
They conscientious study

Reduplicated Two Syllable Adjectives
AABB - - Verb
When two syllable adjectives are reduplicated they are in the form of AABB. The
second A syllable and the second B syllable are spoken in the neutral tone. For
instance, (rn zhn) (conscientious) becomes (rn ren zhn zhen). In
this case, (de) must be used. Be careful when using this form, not all two syllable
adjectives can be reduplicated.

subject reduplicated
adjective
predicate
verb

tmen rn ren zhn zhen de xu x
They conscientious study

Example Sentences
1. ()
2.
3.
4.

1.
mqn jnjin (de) bo zhe t de hizi
2.
t go xng de shuw shu do le pngyou de li xn
3.
t go gao xng xing de shu
w shu do le pngyu de li xn
4.
t de fm dng le t sn g xiosht li wn le

1. The mother tightly held her child.
2. He happily said, I received a letter from my friend.
3. He happily said, I received a letter from my friend.
Page 222 of 265

4. His parents waited three hours, he came late.

5.
6.
7.
8.

5. t rqng de shuhunyng gungln
6. lo titai mn man de zu zhe
7. Wng jngl j sh jiju le wnt
8. hizi mny de xio le

5. She warmly said, Welcome.
6. The old lady is slowly walking.
7. Manager Wang solved the problem in a timely manner.
8. The child smiled with satisfaction.

Page 223 of 265

Unit 33
(b) Sentences
This unit shows how use the preposition (b). In (b)sentences, the object is
stated before the predicate verb.

New Words
1. n qun di seat belt
2.

b
a preposition used to make a
subject object verb sentence
3.

bn ji
to move (to a new home)
4.

bo
to wrap (a gift, a box)
5.

bo gu
parcel, package
6.

bn zi
notebook
7.

b j bn
notebook
8.

b j bn din
no
laptop computer
9

bin
change to, transform
10.

bio
form, table, chart
11.

bng rn
sick person, patient
12.

b l
glass, window pane
13.

ch
to plug in
14.

ch tu
electric plug
15.

ch png
covered parking for bicycles
(similar to a carport)
16.

chng
turn into
17.

chu t
drawer
18.

d ki
open, turn on
19.

d sun
to plan
20.

d
pass or hand something to
someone
21

din ch
battery
22.

din z
electronic
23.

din z yu jin
email
24.

f
send, transmit
25.

fng
wind
26.

f x
review (a lesson)
27

gi
change to, transform
28.

g k
customer
Page 224 of 265

29.

gu
blow
30.

gun dio
turn off (electric things)
31.

gun shang
close, turn off
32.

ho m
number
33.

h shng
close a book
34.

h zi
box (small)
35.

h zho
passport
36.

hu png
flower vase
37.

j
to take note, remember, record
38.

j
put on or wear belts, scarves
and tied things
39.

j pio
plane ticket
40.

ji k
jacket
41.

ji
to receive, to pick up (i.e., a
child from school)
42.

ji din hu
to answer the phone
43.

ji ki
take off (a belt)
44.

jng ch
police
45.

kng
to carry something on ones
shoulders
46.

kng tio
air conditioner
47.

l
pull
48.

l lin
zipper
49.

l w
gift
50.

lin
face
51.

Ll
a name of a person
52.

lng di
necktie
53.

m fan
trouble, inconvenience
54.

mi yun
American dollars
55.

min bo
bread
56.

mng
measure word for persons
57.

mng xn pin
postcard
58.

m sh sh
magician
59.

no zhng
alarm clock
60.

ni
cow
61.

nng
make
Page 225 of 265

62.

png
touch, bump
63.

qi
ball
64.

q
to take, to fetch
65.

rn mn b
Chinese currency
66.

rng
to throw
67.

rng dio
throw away
68.

so
sweep
69.

sh j t
blueprints
70.

shng c
new words
71.

shng zi
rope
72.

shu j
cell phone
73.

shu shi
to put in order, to tidy up
74.

shu
water
75.

tng zh
notice
76.

tong sh
colleague, coworker
77.

tu
take off (clothing and shoes)
78.

wn hu
party (in the evening)
79.

w sh
bedroom
80.

xing zi
box (large), suitcase
81.

xio tu
thief
82.

xi
shoe
83.

xng li
luggage
84.

yu r yun
kindergarten
85.

yu pio
stamp
86.

y f
grammar
87.

y sn
umbrella
88.

y x
preview (a lesson)
89.

y y
raincoat
90.

zhi to take off things [that use ]
91.

zhu
to grab, to sieze, to catch
92.

zhung
load, pack
93.

zhung xi
decorate, remodel
94.

zhn bi
prepare
95.

zu y bn
homework notebook

Page 226 of 265

In (b) sentences, the object is stated before the predicate verb. The simplest (b)
sentence pattern is:

Subject Object Predicate Verb + other elements
doer of the action receiver of the action the action (rule # 8 below)

w b l w bo shng le
I b gift / gifts wrap completed action

(This sentence means, I wrapped the gifts.)

The most important feature of sentences is that the predicate verb must produce a
change in disposition of the object. For example, compare the two sentences below.

This sentence states how the speaker went to school. It means, I drove to school.

w ki ch do xuxio q le

This sentence emphasizes the disposition of the object (car). It means, I took the
car to the school.
w b ch ki do xuxio q le

A speaker could say: (w q shngdin le) (I went to the store) ;
however, it is incorrect to say : (w b shngdin q le) because
the predicate verb (q) does not change the disposition of the object (shng
din).
Summary of rules for simple (b) sentences:
1. The predicate verb must be a transitive verb.
(A transitive verb is an action verb, expressing an activity, like writing or cleaning, and it has
a direct object, something or someone who receives the action of the verb.)
2. Verbs that do not produce action, such as (yu) and (sh) , may not be used.
3. Verbs that indicate mental activity and senses such as (zh do) (to know)
and (x hun) (to like) and (ju de) (to feel) may not be used as
predicate verbs.
4. Verbs that indicate direction such as (q), (li), (ch), (jn),
(shng) and (xi) may not be used as predicate verbs.
5. The pattern [Verb + (gu)] may not be used.
6. A potential compliment that uses (de) does not occur after the predicate verb.
7. When using (b) sentences, it is clear to the listener what the speaker has in
mind. General classifiers may not be used. For instance, a speaker may use a
Page 227 of 265

(b) sentence to say give me that book () (n bn sh) but may not use a
sentence to say give me a book () (y bn sh).
8. (b) sentences may not end with single syllable verb. If a single syllable ends
a sentence then it may be duplicated or the sentences may end in particles such
as (le) or (zhe).

Using (zhe) in (b) sentences
Be careful when using (zhe) in (b) sentences. Since the particle (zhe) may
be used for turning some action verbs into a continuing state, as a general rule, when
using (zhe) to compliment a verb in a (b) sentence, determine if the context of
the sentence uses (zhe) in such a way that the verb produces an action that changes
the disposition of the object. For example: If some people were leaving their hotel or
home to go sightseeing, they could use example sentence 1 or 2 below to say, Lets
take a camera with us. This is the only circumstance when (zhe) would be used in
a (b) sentence to express take something. If the speaker were talking about an
outing that was going to happen the following day, they would use (di shng) or
(n shng), as in sentences 3 and 4 below. (In this case, (shng) is a verb
compliment of results indicating something has reached a certain place.)
If two people were walking down the street and one person were to tell the other
person I have my camera with me the speaker would say,
(w dizhe wde zhoxingj ne). In this context, (zhe) indicates a continuing state
and does not bring about a change in the disposition of the object; therefore, it would
be incorrect to say, (w b wde zhoxingj di zhe). In this
case, it would be correct to say, (w b wde zhoxingj
di li le) which means, I brought my camera with me because the verb and its
compliment (di li) indicate a change of disposition of the object.

Lets take the camera with us.
1. wmen b zhoxingj di zhe
2. wmen b zhoxingj n zhe
3. wmen b zhoxingj di shang
4. wmen b zhoxingj n shang

If someone were pointing out a person in a crowded room by saying, She is the one
wearing a white dress, they would say, (t chun zhe bi s
qnzi); they would not use a sentence, in this case, because the verb does not bring
about change in the disposition of the object. Generally, (chun zhe) is not used
in a sentences.
If someone wanted to draw attention to the fact that a person was wearing a new outfit,
it would be correct to say, (t b xn yfu chun shng le)
because the verb (chun) and its compliment (shng) indicate a change in the
Page 228 of 265

disposition of the object () (xn yfu). This sentence literally means, She has
put on new clothes.
The sentences below may be stated as Subject Verb Object (SVO) sentences or
(b) sentences. There are two reasons sentences, that can be stated using a SVO
sentence pattern, are stated using (b) sentences. Sometimes, they are used to place
emphasis on the changed disposition of the object, as explained above. Sometimes,
the predicate verbs are followed by fairly complicated constructions involving verb
compliments so it is generally easier to state the object first.

A. I have finished yesterdays homework.

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. w zu wn le zutin de zuy
2. w b zutin de zuy zu wn le

B. I have brought the blueprints.

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. w di li le shjt
2. w b shjt di li le

C. Let me write down your phone number.

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. w j yxi n de dinhu hom
2. w b nde dinhu hom j yxi

D. I threw away those newspapers.

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. w rngdio le n xi bozh
2. w b n xi bozh rngdio le

Page 229 of 265

E. Father broke the umbrella.

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. bba nng hui le ysn
2. bba b ysn nng hui le

F. I returned the book I borrowed last time.

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. w hun le shng c ji de n bn sh
2. w b shng c ji de n bn sh hun le

G. He knocked over the cup.

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. t png do le bizi
2. t b bizi png do le

H. The wind knocked over the bicycle.

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. fng gu do le zxngch
2. fng b zxngch gu do le

Auxiliary verbs may placed between the subject and .

I. You should wear a raincoat.

1. S - AV V - O
2. sentence
1. n ynggi chun yy
2. n ynggi b yy chun shang

Page 230 of 265

J. I will throw away those newspapers.

1. S - AV V - O
2. sentence
1. w hu rngdio n xi bozh
2. w hu b n xi bozh rng dio

K. You need to move those books.

1. S - AV V - O
2. sentence
1. n bx bnzu zhxi sh
2. n bx b zhxi sh bnzu

In the examples below, (fng zi) could refer to a single room, an apartment or a
house and (zhung xu) is usually translated as to decorate; however, this
expression also includes construction such as, adding carpet or adding new interior
walls. When a restaurant is being remodeled, there will be a sign in the window that
says (zhung xi) to inform customers that the process of remodeling is going
on. (bn) is used to express carrying things that are too big to carry in one hand.

L. I would like to redecorate my apartment.

1. S - AV V O
2. sentence
1. w xing zhungxi fngzi
2. w xing b fngzi zhungxi yxi

To express possibility auxiliary verbs and may placed between the
subject and .
M. I can repair your computer.

1. S AV V O
2. S AV V O
3. sentence
4. sentence

Page 231 of 265

1. w nng xi n de dinno
2. w nng xil n de dinno
3. w nng b n de dinno xi ho
4. w nng b n de dinno xil ho

N. I can print your file.

1. S AV V O
2. sentence
1. w ky dyn n de wnjin
2. w ky b nde wnjin dyn ho

O. We are going to move (our home) to Beijing.

1. S AV V O
2. sentence
1. wmen hu bnji do Bijng
2. wmen hu b ji bn do Bijng

Time phrases may placed between the subject and or before the subject.
If a person had checked out a book from the library, they could use the sentences
below to express that they had returned a certain book last Monday.

P. I returned that book last Monday.

1. S time V O
2. sentence
3. sentence

1. w shngg xngqy hun le n bn sh
2. shngg xngqy w b n bn sh hun le
3. w shngg xngqy b n bn sh hun le

Page 232 of 265

Negative Statements
The negative form of a sentence is made by placing (mi) or (mi yu)
directly before with nothing in between.

Q. I didnt bring blueprints.

1. S-V-O ()
2. sentence ()
1. w mi (yu) di li le shjt
2. w mi(yu) b shjt di li

When auxiliary verbs are used in sentences, to express an unwillingness to do
something or express that a supposition is not true, is placed directly after the
auxiliary verb and before with nothing in between.

R. I cant print your file.

1. S AV V O
2. sentence
1. w b nng dyn n de wnjin
2. w b nng b n de wnjin dyn ho

Questions
(ma) or (mi yu) may be used to form yes no questions.

S. Have you finished yesterdays homework?

1. S-V-O
2. S-V-O
3. sentence
4. sentence
1. n zu wn le zutin de zuy ma
2. n zu wn le zutin de zuy mi yu
3. n b zutin de zuy zu wn le ma
4. n b zutin de zuy zu wn le mi yu

Page 233 of 265

There are three ways to answer (ma) and (mi yu) questions negatively:

mi yu hi mi yu hi mi yu ne
no not yet not yet

To answer (ma) and (mi yu) questions affirmatively you can repeat the
verb and the compliment of result as well as the particle (le).

verb verb compliment
of results
completed action
particle

zu wn le

To answer (ma) questions affirmatively, you may also answer (du).
Questions that use (mi yu) may not be answered with (du).

In all the example questions below, (ma) may be used to replace (mi yu)
and visa-versa. However, only the (ma) questions may be answered with (du).

T. (1,2) Have you brought the blueprints? (3) Has anyone brought the blueprints?

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
3. sentence
1. n di li le shjt mi yu
2. n b shjt di li mi yu
3. yu rn b shjt di li le mi yu

affirmative answer: (di li le)

U. Have you written down my phone number?

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. n j xi li wde dinhu hom le ma
2. n b wde dinhu hom j xi li le ma

affirmative answer: (j xi lai le) / (du)

Page 234 of 265

V. (1,2) Did you throw away those newspapers? (3) Who threw away the newspapers?

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
3. sentence
1. n rngdio le n xi bozh mi yu
2. n b n xi bozh rngdio le mi yu
3. shi b n xi bozh rngdio le

(questions 1,2) affirmative answer: (rng dio le)

answer to
(question 3): bba b nxi bozh rng dio le
Father threw away the newspapers.

answer to
(question 3): w b zhdo
I dont know.

W. Did Father break the umbrella?

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. bba nng hui le ysn ma
2. bba b ysn nng hui le ma

affirmative answer: (nng hui le) / (du)

X. Did you return the book you borrowed last time?

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1. n hun le shng c ji de n bn sh mi yu
2. n b shng c ji de n bn sh hun le mi yu

affirmative answer: (hun le)

Page 235 of 265

Y. Did you get the camera out?

1. S-V-O
2. sentence
1.
n n ch li le zho xing j ma
2.
n b zho xing j n ch li le ma

affirmative answer: (n ch li le) / (du)

Z. Did you get the camera out of the car?

1. S-V-O
2. S-V-O
3. sentence
1. n cng ch l n ch li zho xing j le mi yu
2. n cng ch l n ch li le zho xing j mi yu
3. n b zho xing j cng ch l n ch li le mi yu

affirmative answer: (n ch li le)

A1. Have you put the battery in?

n b dinch zhung shng le ma

affirmative answer: (zhung shng le) / (du)

B1. Have you finished your homework?

n b zuy zu wn le mi yu

affirmative answer: (zu wn le)

C1. Have you finished cooking dinner?

n b wnfn zu ho le ma

affirmative answer: (zu ho le) / (du)

Page 236 of 265

D1. Have you packed your bags?

n b xngli zhnbi ho le mi yu

affirmative answer: (zhn bi ho le)

E1. 1. 2.

Have you plugged it in?

1. n b chtu ch shng le ma
2. n b chtu ch jn q le mi yu

affirmative answers:
1. (ch shng le) / (du)

2. (ch jn q le)

F1. Did you plug in the laptop?

n b bjbn dinno chtu ch jn q le mi yu

affirmative answer: (ch jn q le)

In the sentence below the speaker is talking to a person who has just returned from the
post office. The speaker knows that the listener has gone to the post office and was
expecting to receive a parcel in the mail.

G1. Did you pick up the package?

n b bogu q hu li le ma

affirmative answer: (q hu li le) / (du)

H1. Did you mail the letter?

n b xn f ch q le mi yu

affirmative answer: (f ch q le)

I1. Did you send the email?

n b din z yu jin f ch q le mi yu

Page 237 of 265

affirmative answer: (f ch q le)

In the question below, the speaker is making sure the listener put something in some
place. For instance, if two people were in the process of leaving a travel agency and
the speaker wanted to make sure that the listener had not forgotten to put the airline
tickets in her purse or bag, the sentence below would be used.

J1. Did you put the tickets away?

n b jpio fng jn q le mi yu

affirmative answer: (fng jn q le)

In questions that use auxiliary verbs, is used ( cannot be used). In these
sentences the questions concern the auxiliary verbs being used, not the actions. For
instance, to say Did he take his book bag yesterday? either (ma) or (mi
yu) are correct because the question concerns the the action of taking the bookbag.
[(t zutin n le shbo miyu?) and
(t zutin n le shbo ma?)] However, (mi yu) could not be used to ask
Was it necessary for him to take his book bag? because the question concerns the
necessity of taking the book bag, not the action of taking the bookbag. [
(t zutin bx n shbo ma?)]

Questions with auxiliary verbs may be answered affirmatively by repeating the
auxiliary verb or saying (du).

To answer questions with auxiliary verbs negatively, use (b) and then the
auxiliary verb.

K1. Should I wear a raincoat?

1. S AV V O
2. sentence
1. w ynggi chun yy ma
2. w ynggi b yy chun shng ma

affirmative answer: (yng gi) / (du)
negative answer: (b yng gi)

L1. Are you going to throw away those newspapers?

1. S AV V O
Page 238 of 265

2. sentence
1. n hu rngdio n xi bozh ma
2. n hu b n xi bozh rng dio ma

affirmative answer: (hu) / (du)
negative answer: (b hu)

M1. Do I need to move those books?

1. S - AV V - O
2. sentence
1. w bx bn zu zh xi sh ma
2. w bx b zh xi sh bn zu ma

affirmative answer: (b x) / (du)
negative answer: (b b)

N1. Would you like to redecorate your apartment?

1. S - AV V - O
2. sentence
1. n xing zhungxi fngzi ma
2. n xing b fngzi zhungxi yxi ma

affirmative answer: (xing) / (du)
negative answer: (b xing)

O1. Can you repair my computer?

1. S AV V O
2. S AV V O
3. sentence
4. sentence
1. n nng xi w de dinno ma
2. n nng xil w de dinno ma
3. n nng b w de dinno xi ho ma
4. n nng b w de dinno xil ho ma

affirmative answer: (nng) / (du)
Page 239 of 265

negative answer: (b nng)

P1. Can you print my file?

1. S AV V O
2. sentence
1. n ky dyn w de wnjin ma
2. n ky b w de wnjin dyn ho ma

affirmative answer: (k y) (most common) / (du)
negative answer: (b k y) / (b xng)

Commands and Requests
(that begin with )

In spoken Chinese it is not uncommon to hear a sentence begin with . When
making commands, such as close the door, and it is obvious who the speaker is
talking to, then the subject is implied, not stated. If there were a group of people and
the speaker wanted to single out one person, then a subject would be used. For
instance, in the example below, if someone were requesting the listener to take their
cell phone out of their purse or pocket, they would use the following sentence pattern.

Get your cell phone out (of your purse, bag or pocket).
Subject Object
Predicate
Verb
+ other elements
doer of the action receiver of the action the action
compliment of
result
(implied not spoken)
b shu j n ch li
b cell phone fetch take out

In the examples below, if the speaker wanted to say hurry up, they would begin the
sentence with (kui) (quickly).

Quickly! get your cell phone out (of your purse, bag or pocket).

Object Predicate Verb + other elements

kui b shu j n ch li
quickly b cell phone fetch take out

Page 240 of 265

If the speaker wanted to say please, they would begin the sentence with (qng)
(please).
Object Predicate Verb + other elements

qng b shu j n ch li
please b cell phone fetch take out

If the speaker wanted to say please help me (do something) , they would begin the
sentence with (qng bng w). In Chinese, the word help can be used to
mean that two people do something together, or that someone is doing something
for someone. The following sentence can mean either, Please help me erase the
blackboard. (Both the speaker and the listener are erasing the blackboard) or Please
erase the blackboard for me. (The listener is erasing the blackboard alone.)

Object Predicate Verb (duplicated)

qng bng w b hi bn c ca
please help me
b blackboard clean / wipe

(c) means to wipe and is used to express to wipe something to clean it. In the
sentences below, (c c) or (c yi c) may be used. (so) means to
sweep , in the last sentence below (so yi so) could also be used.

1. b zhuz c ca Wipe off the table.

Clean off the table.
2. b lin c yi c Dry your face.
3. b bl c ca Clean the window.
4. b d c yi c Mop the floor.
5. b hibn c ca Erase the blackboard.
6. b d so sao Sweep the floor.

(d ki) is used to express both turn on as well as open ; (gun shang)
is used to express both turn off as well as close.
7. b kngtio d ki
Turn the air
conditioner on.
8. b kngtio gun shang
Turn the air
conditioner off.
9. b chung h d ki Open the window.
10. b chung h gun shang Close the window.

Page 241 of 265

These nouns could be used to replace any of the things in the sentences above:

din sh television
h zho passport
mn the door
xing zi box, suitcase
shu j cell phone
dng light, lamp
kng tio air conditioner
din no computer

(gun dio) may be also used to express turn off when talking about things
that are electric.

11. b kng tio gun dio
Turn the air
conditioner off.

In the sentences above, for the things that are physically closed (not electric), such as
doors and windows, (mi gun ho) would be used to express that something
was closed well. For instance, if someone was getting out of a car and the door wasnt
closed well, the driver would say (mi gun ho).

In the above example, it is assumed that the window opens on hinges, like a door.
When talking about opening or closing things that slide, such as curtains or windows
that slide, the verb pull [ (l)] is used, as in the examples below.

12. b chung lin l ki Open the curtains.
13. b chung lin l shang Close the curtains.
14. b chung h l ki Open the window.
15. b chung h l shang Close the window.
16. b l lin l shang Zip up your jacket.

(d ki) is used when saying open your book ; (h shng) is used to
express close your book. This is also true for telling someone to close a magazine
[ (z zh)] or a notebook [ (b j bn)].

17. b n de sh d ki Open your book.
18. b n de sh h shang Close your book.

To say put on clothes, (chun shang) is used. For instance, if a children were
leaving for school, and their mother told them put on their coats [ (wi y)]; she
Page 242 of 265

would say (b wiy chun shang). If it is clear what item of clothing
the speaker is referring to, any article of clothing may be referred to as clothes [
(yf)]. To say take off an article of clothing, (tu xi li) is used. In the
sentences below, (n de) is optional.

19.
()
b (n de) yfu chun shang.
20.
()
b (n de) yfu tu xi li.
21.
()
b (n de) xi chun shang.
22.
()
b (n de) xi tu xi li.

19. Put on your (an article of clothing that is clear to the listener).
20. Take off your (an article of clothing that is clear to the listener).
21. Put on your shoes.
22. Take off your shoes.

(chun ho) may be used to tell someone to put on an article of clothing or to
tell someone to fix something that is wrong. For instance, a parent could use the
sentence below to tell a child to zip up the jacket they are wearing or to tell the child
to put on their jacket.
23. b yfu chun ho

When expressing putting on [ (chun shng)] or wearing [ (chun zhe)]
articles of clothing, (chun) is not used for everything one can wear. For wearing
some things, such as hats, glasses, and gloves; (di) is used. When referring to
items that are worn, but are tied, for example a necktie, (di) or (j) may used. If
someone wanted to tell a person wearing a tie that it wasnt tied well, they would say,
(mi j ho) or (mi di ho) which means your tie isnt straight.
(zhi) is used to express taking off when taking off things that use (di) or (j)
to express putting on.

24. Put on your glasses. b ynjng di shang.
25. Take off your glasses. b ynjng zhi xi li.

In the sentences above, (yn jng) could be replaced by any one of the articles
listed below.

shu to gloves
*
yo di *belt

xing lin necklace
*
wi jn *neck scarf

r hun ear rings
*
lng di *necktie

mo zi hat / cap
Page 243 of 265

*To say put on or to wear a necktie, neck scarf or belt; (j) or (di) may be
used. To say take off a belt, (ji ki) is used.

In the sentences below, (shng) and (ho) are compliments of results. In the
contexts below, (shng) is only used to express put on, but (ho) may be used
for expressing put on as well as expressing to adjust. For example, the first
sentence means put on a tie. The second sentence below could mean put on a tie
or straighten your tie.
26. Put on a tie. b lngdi j shang.
27. Put on a tie. b lngdi j ho.

Straighten you tie.

28. Tie your shoes. b xi di j shang.
29. Tie your shoes. b xi di j ho.

Re-tie you shoe laces.

30. Fasten your seatbelt. b nqun di j shang.
31. Fasten your seatbelt. b nqun di j ho.

Adjust your seatbelt.

32. Tie that rope. b shng zi j shang.
33. Tie that rope. b shng zi j ho.

Re-tie that rope.

Remember, that the context of the sentence is important when using (zhe) in (b)
sentences. (refer to the explanation at the beginning of this unit.)

Sentences 34 37 all mean Take your passport.

34.
b hzho di zhe.
35.
b hzho n zhe.
36.
b hzho di shang.
37.
b hzho n shang.

In the sentences below, (di) or (n) could be used.

38.
Take an umbrella. b ysn di shang.
39.
Take a camera. b xingj n shang.

40. Take the books you checked out from the library last week.

40.
b n shng g xngq
ji de sh n shang
Page 244 of 265

(fng ho) means to put something away in its proper place. For example, if
two were leaving an embassy, the speaker might remind the listener to put their
passport in their bag so that it wouldnt fall out of a pocket or get misplaced. At home,
(fng ho) could be used to tell children to put away their toys.

41.
Put your passport away. b hzho fngho.

The sentences below would be used to tell another person to clean up a messy area by
putting things away. For instance, if someones desk is messy, or if a teacher tells a
class of students to clean off their desks in preparation for a test.

42.
Put your things away. b dngxi shu q li
43.
Put your things away. b dngxi fng q li

If the speaker is telling the listener to put something in a place that is higher up than
the speaker (fng shng q) is used. For instance, if a person had just boarded
a plane or train, an attendant would use the sentence below to tell the passenger to put
their luggage in the overhead luggage rack or storage compartment. This phrase could
also be used to tell someone to put a box on a shelf (that is higher up than the speaker).
(xing zi) is used to refer to many kinds of relatively large boxes such as,
cardboard boxes, trunks and suitcases.

44.

Put the box up
there.
b xingzi fng shng q.
45.

Put you luggage
up there.
b xngl fng shng q.

To tell someone to put something here or there the following sentences are used.

46.

Put the suitcase(s)
over here.
b xingzi fng zi zhr.
47.

Put the suitcase(s)
over there.
b xingzi fng zi nr.

(hzi) is used to refer to many kinds of relatively small boxes such as shoe boxes
and boxes that small merchandise comes in.

48. Put the box in the drawer.

48. b n g hzi fng jn chut l

Page 245 of 265

The sentence below is used to tell someone to take something out of something (a bag,
a pocket, a suitcase, a car). is usually for something small that can be moved using
one hand. When larger things are being moved, such as moving a sofa out of a room,
(bn) is used.

49.
Get out the camera. b xingj n ch li.
50.
Bring the sofa out. b shf bn ch li.

(of a room / a house)

51. Bring the sofa out of the living room.

51. b shf cng ktng bn ch li

52. Hang up (an article of clothing).

52. b yf gu shang.

53. Hang up that picture on the wall.

53. b hu gu zi qing shang.

54. Put a battery in (something).

54. b dinch zhung shang

55.
Close the door. b mn gun yxi

56. Wash this article of clothing.

56. b zh jin yfu x yxi

57. Wash these clothes.

57. b zh xi yfu x yxi

58. Preview todays new words (Go over the words we will study in todays lesson.)

58. b jntin de shngc yx yxi

59. Review yesterdays grammar.

59. b zutin de yf fx yxi

Page 246 of 265

60. Clean up this room.

60. b fng jin shushi yxi

To Give Something to Someone
In Mandarin SVO sentences that use (gi) to express giving something to
someone, it is possible to have two objects. In English sentences, prepositional
phrases that have indirect objects are used to accomplish the same thing. For instance,
in the sentence, Anna gave that sweater to me., the direct object is the word
sweater because it receives the action of the verb, and the word me (in the
prepositional phrase to me) is the indirect object which represents the secondary
goal of the action of the verb. In the sentences below, object 2 would be indirect
objects in English sentences. In first example below, it is clear who is being spoken to,
so the implied subject, (n), does not need to be spoken. In the second example, the
subject is Anna.
Give your plane ticket and passport to me.
object 1 object 2

b jpio h hzho gi w

Anna, give your plane ticket and passport to her.
subject object 1 object 2

n n b jpio h hzho gi t

In sentences that show intention or completed actions, an auxiliary verb is needed to
show intention (example sentence 1 below) or the particle (le) would be used to
show that the action had been completed (example sentences 2 and 3 below).

(1) I will give this red sweater to a friend.
subject auxiliary verb object object

w hu b zh jin hng moy gi png you

(2) Anna gave that sweater to her boyfriend.
subject object object particle

n n b n jin moy gi t de nn pngyou le

(3) Anna gave that sweater to her boyfriend.
subject object particle object

n n b n jin moy gi le t de nn pngyou

Page 247 of 265

1. Give that book to me. b n bn sh gi w.

2. Give me your homework. b zuy gi w.

3. Give me your plane ticket. b jpio gi w

4. Give the teacher the homework notebooks.

4. b zuybn gi losh

5. Give that gift to mother.

5. b n jin lw gi mma

6. Give that dictionary to Anna.

6. b n bn cdin gi nn

These examples show the use of (7, 10) auxiliary verbs and (8,9,11,12) the particle
(le) in (b) sentences that use (gi).

7. w hu b n jin lw gi mma
8. w b n jin lw gi le mma
9. w b n jin lw gi mma le

7. I will give that picture to Mom.
8. I gave that picture to Mom.
9. I gave that picture to Mom.

10. w hu b n bn cdin gi nn
11. w b n bn cdin gi le nn
12. w b n bn cdin gi nn le

10. I will give that dictionary to Anna.
11. I gave that dictionary to Anna.
12. I gave that dictionary to Anna.

Using verbs with compliments of results in (b) sentences
First, we will review how to use (gi), as a compliment of results, in sentences that
do not use (b). When using a verb followed by the compliment of results, (gi),
it is possible to have two objects and not use a sentence. (gi) is used as a
compliment of results to express that the verb has resulted giving something to a
Page 248 of 265

second party. No characters may go between a verb and its compliment of results.
He handed a letter to me.
subject predicate
verb
compliment of
results
object
1
object
2
particle

t jio gi w y fng xn
le

He to hand
something
to someone
to result in giving I one letter (completed
action)

To say the same thing, using a (b) sentence, (y fng xn) cannot be used
because it is not specific. Also, it would be incorrect to say
(t jio n fng xn gi w le) because the compliment of results, (gi),
must go immediately after the verb (jio).

He handed that letter to me.
subject object 1 predicate
verb
compliment
of result
object 2 particle

t b n fng xn jio gi w
le

He b that letter to hand
something
to someone
to result in
giving
I (completed
action)

Example Sentences
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.
qng b zh zhng bio jio gi Wng losh
2.
w mngtin ji b zh zhng bio jio gi Wng losh
3.
Wng xinshngmfan n b zh fngxn jio gi Ll
4.
w de zhoxingj hui len nng b n de zhoxingj ji gi
w ma
5.
Ll dsun b mngxnpin j gi t de pngyou
Page 249 of 265

6.
mfan nb minbo d gi w

1. Please give this form to the teacher.
2. I will give the Teacher Wang the form tomorrow.
3. Mr. Wang, can I trouble you to give this letter to Lili?
4. My camera is broken, can you lend me yours?
5. Lili plans to mail this postcard to her friend.
6. Could I trouble you to pass the bread?

Sentences that must use (b)
In sentences with two objects and the verb compliment of results is (zi), (do),
or (chng) it is necessary to use a (b) sentence because the compliment of
results must directly follow the verb with nothing between them.

The compliment of results (zi) is used to express that a person or thing has reached
or will reamain at a certain place - by the action of the verb. If a speaker were looking
at a bookshelf full of books and told the listener to put one specific book on the table,
the example sentence below would be used. It would be incorrect to say ()
( [n] fang n bn sh zi zhuz shng) because the compliment of
results, (zi), must immediately follow the verb (fng). Furthermore, in a (b)
sentence, (y bn sh) could not be used because it is not specific.

Put that book on the table.
object 1 predicate
verb
compliment of
result
object 2

b n bn sh fng zi
zhuzi shng

b that book put to result in being
at a place
on the table

Little Wang, put that book on the table.
verb
compliment of
result
object 2

Xio Wng b n bn sh fng zi
zhuzi shng

Little Wang b that book put to result in being
at a place
on the table

Example Sentences
1.

2.

Page 250 of 265

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1. b sh bi zi sh ji shng
2. t b tngzh gu zi mn wi bin le
3. b n hupng fng zi zhuz shng
4. ll b t de dinhu hom xi zi bnzi shng le
5. w b zxngch fng zi luxi de chpng l le
6. xio mng b nozhng fng zi chung png bin le
7. t b yupio ti zi xnfng le
8. b n hupng fng zi nr

1. Arrange the books (properly) in the bookcase.
2. He hung a notice on the outside of the door.
3. Put the vase on the table.
4. Lili wrote his phone number in her notebook.
5. I put (my,the) bicycle down in the covered bicycle parking area.
6. Little Ming put his alarm clock next to his bed.
7. He put the stamp on the envelope.
8. Where do I put this vase of flowers.

The compliment of results (do) is used to express that the action of the verb has
resulted in a person or thing reaching a certain place, achieveing a goal or an action
continuing until a certain time. If a speaker told a listener to take a form to the office,
the example sentences below could be used.

Take this form to the office.
object 1 predicate
verb
compliment of
result
object 2

b zh zhng bio sng do
bn gng sh
b this form deliver arrive at office

Page 251 of 265

Please take this form to the office for me.
object 1 predicate
verb
compliment
of result
object 2

qng bng w b zh zhng bio sng do
bn gng sh
Please help me b this form deliver arrive at office

Example Sentences
1.
2.
3.
4.

1.
w hi mi b zh zhng bio sng do bngngsh
2.
mma b hizi sng do yuryun le
3.
w b qch ki do d mn ku le
4.
xushng yo ki wnhub zhuzi bn do jiosh l

1. I havent taken the form to the office yet.
2. Mother took her child to kindergarten.
3. He drove the car to the main gate.
4. The students are going to have a party, move the tables into the classroom.

The compliment of results (chng) is used to express that a person or thing has
been changed into something of another kind by the action of the verb.

He exchanged American dollars for Chinese renminbi (yuan).
verb
compliment
of result
object 2 particle

t b miyun hun chng rn mn b
le
He b American
dollars
exhange changed into Chinese
currency
(completed
action)

Example Sentences
1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 252 of 265

5.

1. n nng bng w b zh pin wnzhng
fny chng yngy ma
2.
t b w dng chng r bn rn le
3.
mma b dy gi chng le jik
4.
mshsh b zh bin chng hu le
5.
n nng b t fny chng yngy ma

1. Can you help me translate this article into English?
2. He thought I was Japanese.
3. Mom changed the coat into a jacket.
4. The magician turned paper into flowers.
5. Can you translate it into English?

If a beginner student were learning to write Chinese characters and wanted to write
the word cow [ (ni)] but mistakenly wrote the character used in afternoon
[(xi w)] then the following sentence would be used.

6. You wrote incorrectly and actually wrote .

6. n b ni xi chng w le

If a beginner student were learning to speak Chinese wanted to say the word some
[ (xi)] but mistakenly said shoe [ (xi)] then the following sentence would be
used.

7. You wanted to say some by you actually said shoe.

7. n b xi shu chng le xi

In the sentence below, the person who answered the phone did not understand the
person who made the call. The person making the call said 10 but the person who
answered the phone thought the caller said 4.

8. The person who answered the phone thought he/she heard 4 but I said 10.

8.
ji din hu de rn b sh tng chng s le

In the sentence below, the person speaking has been mistaken for another person
called Teacher Wang.

Page 253 of 265

9. He mistook me for Teacher Wang.

9. t b w kn chng Wng losh le

Note: Notice that it does not change the meaning of the sentences if (le) is placed
after the verb or at the end of the sentences in these cases.

Compound Compliment of Direction used in Sentences
A (b) sentence must be used when the sentences has two objects and the predicate
verb has a compound directional compliment with an object of place. Remember that,
in a sentences with a compound compliment of direction with an object is a location,
the object must placed directly before (q) or (li). For example:

This table only shows the parts of speech for example sentences 1 and 2 below so it
will be easier to understand the explanations. These are not sentences.

object 1
predicate
verb
compound
compliment of
direction
object 2
location
(not a sentence) 1.
(not a sentence)
2.

In both sentences below, notice that their second objects are locations and are placed
between the two characters of the compound compliment of directions.

1.
2.

1. w b w de pngyou sng hu ji q le
2. lobn b xn tngsh di jn bngngsh li le

1. I took my friend home.
2. The boss brought the new co-worker into the office.

come up
In the first sentence, the speaker is in a higher place than Little Wang, perhaps Little
Wang has just come up a flight of stairs. In the second sentence, the speaker is on the
top of the mountain and Little Wang has come up the mountain carrying food and
water. The word (kng) indicates that the things he carried were carried on his
shoulder(s).

1.
Page 254 of 265

2.

1.
Xio Wng b shu h shpn du kng shng li le
2.
Xio Wng b shu h shpn du kng shng shn li le

1. Little Wang brought the water and food up.
2. Little Wang brought the water and food up here to the top (of the mountain).

go up
In sentence 2, the child is not as tall as the car so he must throw the ball up when
throwing it onto the top of the car.

1.

2.

1.
xiohi b qi rng shng q le
2.
xiohi b qi rng shng ch q le

1. The child threw the ball up.
2. The child threw the ball up onto the top of the car.

come down
In these sentences, the speaker is on a floor that is lower than the person who carried
the patient (or sick person). Using (li) indicates that the patient was carried
toward the speaker. Using (xi) indicates that the patient was carried down from a
higher place. (bi) indicates the patient (or sick person) was carried on
someones back. For instance, if someone had broken their ankle and someone carried
them horse-style.

1.
2.

1.
t b bngrn bi xi li le
2.
t b bngrn bi xi lu li le

1. He carried the patient down. (on his back)
2. He came downstairs with the patient (on his back).

Page 255 of 265

go down
In these sentences, the speaker was part of the group of people that moved some
books. For example, the books are now in a classroom on the first floor and the
speaker is on the second floor.

1.

2.

1. wmen b sh bn xi q le
2. wmen b sh bn xi lu q le

1. We took the books down.
2. We took the books downstairs.

come in
In these sentences, the compliment, (li), indicates that the action is coming toward
the speaker. In this case, the speaker is inside the bedroom. The word (bo) is
used when carrying something in your arms, the way a baby would be carried.

1.

2.

1. t b xio gu bo jn li le
2. t b xio gu bo jn wsh li le

1. She carried the dog in.
2. She carried the dog into the bedroom.

go in
In these sentences, (fng) can mean a house, apartment or a room. Using (q),
indicates the action is moving away from the speaker. In this case, the speaker is
outside the room, house or apartment and the things were moved in.

1.

2.

1.
wmen b dngx du bn jn q le
2.
wmen b dngx du bn jn xn fng q le

1. We took everything in.
Page 256 of 265

2. We took everything into the new room (or home).

return , come
In these sentences, (ji) means that mother has picked up the child, (Xio
Mng) and returned to their home. For instance, if the mother had gone to the childs
school to bring him/her home from school. The compliment, (li), indicates the
action is moving toward the speaker. In this case, the speaker is inside the home.

1.

2.

1.
mma b Xio Mng ji hu li le
2.
mma b Xio Mng ji hu ji li le

1. Mother brought Xio Mng back.
2. Mother brought Xio Mng back home.

return go
In these sentences, (ji) means that mother has picked up the child, (Xio
Mng). The compliment, (q), indicates that the action is moving away from the
speaker. In this case, the speaker is at the place where the mother picked up
(Xio Mng) and both the mother and child have gone away from the place the
speaker is. For instance, if a child at school asked a teacher where Xio Mng is, a
teacher could use the second sentences below to express that Xio Mngs mother had
taken him home.

1.

2.

1.
Xio Mng de mm b Xio Mng ji hu qle
2.
Xio Mng de mm b Xio Mng ji hu ji q le

1. Xio Mngs mother picked up Xio Mng and took him back.
2. Xio Mngs mother picked up Xio Mng and took him back home.

go out
In these sentences, (rng) means to throw something away. The compliment,
(q), indicates that action is moving away from the speaker. In this case, the speaker is
in the classroom and the trash is being taken out of the classroom.

1.

2.

Page 257 of 265

1.
dji b lj rng ch q le
2.
dji b lj rng ch jiosh q le

1. Eveyone took the trash out (and threw it away).
2. Eveyone took the trash (that was in the classroom) out (and threw it away).

The sentences below would not be stated with an object of place.

come out
1.

2.

1. ml b sh n ch li le
2. ml b sh cng shbol n ch li le

1. Mary got that book out.
2. Mary took that book out of her bookbag.

go across
In this sentence, (d) means to pass, handover, give. For instance, if a customer
were handing money to a cashier and the cashier was standing behind a counter. The
compliment, (q), indicates that the customer is on the same side of the counter as
the speaker and has passed the money way from the speaker to the cashier.

The customer handed the money over.

gk b qin d gu q le

come across
In this sentence, (jio) means to call out. (tong xu) which means
classmate is sometimes used to express the word student. In the sentence below,
the teacher has called one of the students to come to the front of the room where the
teacher is sitting at his/her desk. The compliment, (li), indicates that the teacher
told the student to come toward him/her.

The teacher called the student over.

losh b y mng tngxu jio
gu li le

Page 258 of 265

start and continue something

The police caught the thief.

jngch b xiotu zhu q li le

Page 259 of 265

Unit 34
(bi) Sentences
This unit shows how use (bi) to make passive voice sentences.

New Words
1.

bi
introduces the doer of an action
in a passive sentence
2.

b zi
neck
3.

ch y
tea leaves
4.

chng
to dash against with great force
5.

chu
blow
6

dng
light
7.

dng
sting (by a mesquito or bee)
8.

dng
to move
9.

g niang
young lady
10.

gung
used up, nothing left
11.

ki shu
boiling water
12.

kui
a piece of
13.

l yn j
cassette tape recorder
14.

p png
critisize
15.

q pin
cheat, swindle
16.

ru
meat
17.

shng
to injure
18.

sh y
leaf
19.

su
to lock
20

tng
to burn, to scald
21.

t
kick
22.

ti l
railway, railroad tracks
23.

wn zi
mosquito
24.

yo
bite
25.

yun zi
yard, courtyard
26.

zhi
pick (flowers, fruit, etc.)
27.

zhu zh
to catch, to sieze
28.

zhung
to bump, to hit

Page 260 of 265

Comparison of Active and Passive voice
(bi) sentences are passive voice sentences. (bi) introduces the doer of an
action in a passive voice sentence. In active voice sentences, the subject is the doer of
the action. In passive voice sentences, subject is the receiver of the action. For
instance, A thief stole my bicycle is an active voice sentence and My bicycle was
stolen by a thief is a passive voice sentence.
Active voice: A thief stole my bicycle.
Subject Predicate Verb Object
doer of the action the action receiver of the action

xio tu tu le
w de zxngch
Thief steal completed action my bicycle

Passive voice: My bicycle was stolen by a thief.
Subject Object
( of )
Predicate Verb + other elements
receiver of the action doer of the action the action (rule # 2 below)

w de zxngch bi xio tu tu
le
My bicycle thief steal completed action

Sometimes, the object of (bi), the doer of the action, may be omitted. In this case,
(bi) goes directly before the predicate verb.
Passive voice: My bicycle was stolen
Subject Predicate Verb + other elements
receiver of the action the action (rule # 2 below)

w de zxngch bi tu

My bicycle steal completed action

Summary of rules for simple (bi) sentences:
1. The predicate verb must be a transitive verb.
2. The predicate verb must be followed by other elements such as a compliment,
(le) or (guo).
3. Potential compliments, using (de) cannot be placed after the predicate verb.
4. The aspect particle (zhe) cannot be placed after the predicate verb.
Page 261 of 265

1. The thief was caught.
2. That young lady was cheated.
3. The window was blown open.

1. xio tu bi zhu zh le
2. n g gning bi qpin le
3. chungh bi chu ki le

Using (rng) and (jio)
In spoken Chinese, (bi) may be replaced by the prepositions (rng) or (jio).
In sentences that use (rng) and (jio), instead of (bi); the objects of the
prepositions (rng) and (jio), which are the doers of the actions, may not be
omitted.

4.

The dictionary was bought by me.
5.

The new books in the library have
all been borrowed.

4. zdin jio w mi li le
5. tshgun de xn sh du rng rn ji zu le

When it is not necessary or is impossible to tell the doer of the action the word (rn)
may be used in sentences that use (rng), (jio) or (bi).

6.
7.
8.

6. The recorder was moved to another classroom by someone.
7. The flowers in the yard were picked by someone.
8. The door was locked by someone.

6.
lynj bi rn bn do bi de jiosh q le
7.
yunzi l de hur jio rn zhi le
8.
d mn
*
rng rn su le
In sentence 3, (d mn) can mean main door or gate.
Page 262 of 265

When time is specified in a sentence, it may go directly before or directly after the
subject.

The boy was bitten by the dog yesterday.

n g nn hizi zutin
bi gu yo shng le
zutin n g nn hizi
bi gu yo shng le

Negative Statements
The negative form of a (bi) is generally formed by placing (mi) or
(mi yu) directly before (bi).

My bicycle was not stolen by a thief.
Subject Negation Object
( of )
Predicate Verb + other
elements
receiver of the
action
doer of the action the action
(rule # 2
above)

()
w de zxngch mi (yu) bi xio tu tu
zu
My bicycle not thief steal go

My bicycle was not stolen
Subject Negation Predicate Verb + other elements
receiver of the action the action (rule # 2 above)

()
w de zxngch mi (yu) bi tu
zu
My bicycle not steal go

While the grammar involved in creating a negative form of a (bi) sentence isnt
difficult, it is important to remember the context involved when using a negative
(bi) sentence. For instance, if someone should have locked the door but did not, a
speaker may say, (d mn mi bi rn su shng) (The door
wasnt locked by anyone.). However, to simply express that the door isnt locked,
(d mn mi su zhe) (The door isnt locked.) would be used. If
someone should have moved the tape recorder to the classroom, but did not, then
(lynj mi bi rn bn do jiosh l q) (The
recorder was not taken into the classroom by anyone) would be used. However, to
Page 263 of 265

simply express that the recorder is not in the classroom, (lynj
b zi jiosh l) (The recorder isnt in the classroom) would be used.

Questions
Yes / No questions may be formed by adding (ma) or (mi yu) to the end of
a statement.
Was you bicycle stolen?

n de zxngch bi tu le ma
n de zxngch bi tu le mi yu

You may answer with a complete statement or use the following short answers.

affirmative answer: bi tu le Yes, it was stolen.
negative answer: mi bi tu No, it wasnt stolen.
negative answer: mi yu No.

Example Sentences
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1. The leaves have been blown by the wind.
2. The water has been drunk by someone.
3. The door was kicked open by him.
4. The light was turned on by the teacher.
5. The book was bought by him.

1.
sh y bi fng gu po le
2.
shu bi rn h le
3.
mn bi t t ki le
4.
dng bi lo sh d ki le
5.
sh bi t n zu le

In sentence 1 above, (gu po) or (gu zu) would be used to say the
leaves were already on the ground and blowing across the ground. (gu dio)
would mean they were blown off of the tree branches, (dio) means to fall.
Page 264 of 265

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

6. The railway was damaged by the flood.
7. The meat was eaten by the dog.
8. I was criticized by the teacher.
9. What was just said was heard by him.
10. This thing (information / situation / piece of news) is known by them.

6. ti l bi d shu chng hui le
7. n kui ru bi gu ch le
8. w bi losh ppng le
9. gngci shu de hu bi t tng jin le
10. zh jin sh bi t men zhdo le

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

11. The tree was knocked down by the wind.
12. The money was spent by me.
13. My hand was not burned by the boiling water.
14. The things on the table were not moved by anyone.
15. He was hurt by a car.

11. n k sh bi d fng gu do le
12. qin bi w hugung le
13. w de shu mi bi kishu tng shng
14. zhuzi shng de dngxi mi bi rn dng gu
15. t rng qch zhung shng le

16.

17.

Page 265 of 265

18.

19.

20.

16. That pair of vases was taken away by someone.
17. His hat as blown off by the wind.
18. My dog was locked inside the room by someone.
19. My leg was bitten by the dog.
20. My neck was bitten by mosquitoes.

16. n du hupng jio rn n zu le
17. t de mozi jio fng gu dio le
18. w de gu rng rn su zi fng jin l le
19. w de tu bi gu yo le
20. w de bzi bi wnzi dng le

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

21. The new books in the library were all checked (loaned) out.
22. The tea leaves were put on the table by him.
23. The things were put in my bedroom by someone.
24. The book was translated into English by Teacher Wang.
25. The thief was caught by the police.

21. tshgun de xn sh du bi ji ch q le
22. ch y bi t fng zi le zhuzi shng
23. dngxi bi rn fng zi w de w zi l le
24. zh bn sh bi Wng losh fny chng le yngy
25. xiotu bi jngch zhu zh le

Appendix A
Pronunciation Guide to Chinese

Pinyin Phonetic System ........ 1
Tones ..... 1
Pitch .. 2
Inflection ... 2
Neutral Tone Syllables .. 2
Guide to Pinyin Pronunciation Chart ... 2
Initials .. 3
Finals .. 3
Pinyin Chart Pronunciation Guide ... 4
Retroflex r ... 5
Tone Change Rules ... 6
Third Tone Rules . 6
Tone Change Rules for (b) 6
Tone Change Rules for (y) 6

Pinyin Phonetic System
During the 1950s the Chinese government developed and adopted a Romanized
alphabet system to assist with learning Chinese pronunciation. The system, known as
(pn yn) (spell sound), is a letter-based phonetic system that allows one to
speak Chinese with standard pronunciation. Each syllable is represented by pinyin
letters that follow standard pronunciation rules. Tones are accounted for by a tone
mark above each syllable.

first tone second tone third tone fourth tone

Each tone has both pitch and inflection as the diagram below illustrates:

1
st
tone high
Appendix A - Page 1 of 6
Chinese OCW Conversational Chinese is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution, Noncommercial, No

y shng
P 5 4 4
2
nd
tone I 4
r shng T 3 3
C 2
3
rd
tone H 1
1
st

4
th

2
nd

3
rd
sn shng
low
4
th
tone T I M E
s shng

Tones
There are 4 distinct tones, and a neutral tone, which is spoken softly. The four tones:
1
st
- a high (flat) tone, 2
nd
- a rising tone, 3
rd
- a tone that combines a falling and a

rising inflection, and 4
th
- a falling tone. The neutral tone is soft and light. Each
character is one syllable, each syllable has one tone.

The example below shows how different tones distinguish words that are otherwise
pronounced alike.

1
st
tone 2
nd
tone 3
rd
tone 4
th
tone

d d d d
to droop to answer to hit big

Pitch
Notice the pitch of the third and first tones. When speaking a third tone, the fact that
the syllable starts at the lowest pitch of the four tones is important to the listener. The
low pitch of the third tone is the first and most important signal a listener has. While
the inflection of the syllable is important, the pitch is also important. Beginners
usually have problems with third tone syllables because they are concentrating on the
proper inflection. Their main difficulty is that they do not bring the pitch low enough
to be understood when speaking quickly. It is important that the first tone is
distinctively higher, in pitch, than the other tones and that the start of third tone is
lower, in pitch.
Inflection
Since first tone does not require inflection, it is quite easy to master. The English
language uses tones that are similar to the second and fourth tones. The word "no",
spoken sharply, "NO!", is similar to the fourth tone. The word "what", when spoken as
a one word question, "What?" is similar to the second tone. The key to speaking the
second and fourth tones is making sure the tonal inflection very clear. Beginners must
remember not to blend the syllables together. When speaking several syllables in
succession, remember to start at the right pitch followed by a clear inflection.

Neutral Tone Syllables
Some syllables are spoken, relatively softly, without a tone. This is referred to as the
neutral tone, for example, in the word for mother, (mma). As separate
characters each is pronounced as "m", but when put together to form the word for
"mother", the second "ma" becomes is spoken softly and quickly (neutral tone). In the
pinyin phonetic writing system, neutral tones are unmarked.

Guide to Pinyin Pronunciation Chart
A syllable is usually made up of a beginning consonant sound, called an "initial";
followed by a vowel sound, called a "final". Some syllables consist only of a final.
Referencing Pinyin Chart 1, the columns are labeled A through AM and the rows are
numbered from 1 to 23. The initials [ A3 - A23 ] are followed by finals [ B1 - AM1 ]
to complete one syllable. For example:

initial + final = one syllable
[A3] + [B1] = [B3]
b + a = ba

Initials
The initials [A3-A23] pinyin pronunciations are approximately the same as they are in
English with the exception of z, c, zh, q, and x.

Column Initial Pronunciation Guide
A11 z like 'dz' or the 'ds' in suds
A12 c like the 'ts' in rats
A14 zh like 'j' in just with tongue back
A19 q like the 'ch' in cheese with tongue forward
A20 x like the 'sh' in sheet with tongue forward

Finals
The finals [ B1 - AN1 ] may also be used alone, however some of them are spelled
differently when they are used alone. Row 2 [ B2 - AM2 ] shows the pinyin spellings
of the finals when they are used alone. Notice that initials E2, F2 and P2 are blank
because the finals in E1, F1, and P1 are not used alone. Notice that the sounds on the
chart in Row 1, from Q1 to AN1 are not the same as the spellings in Row 2 from Q2
to AN2. This is because these syllables, when used alone, are spelled differently than
simply spelling the final. For example: The pinyin spelling of is 'wang'. However,
there is no initial 'w' [ A3 - A23 ]. In this case, the pinyin for this word has no
consonant initial. The final, 'uang' [ AH1 ], stands alone as a single syllable. A 'w' is
used in place of the 'u' in the pinyin spelling, as shown in row 2. [ AH2 ]. The sounds
used for pronunciation are in Row 1 and the pinyin spellings are in Row 2.


Pinyin Chart (Pronunciation Guide)
Column Final Pronunciation Guide
B a like 'a' in father
C o like 'o' in more
D e like 'u' in up
* Note 1

E no letter like 'r' in shirt
F no letter like 'i' in quiz
G er like the American pronunciation of the letter 'r'
* Note 2

H ai like 'ai' in aisle
I ei like 'ei' in weigh
J ao like 'ow' in now
K ou like 'ough' in though
L an begins with an 'a' like in father and ends with 'n' like in no
M en like 'en' in open
N ang begins with an 'a' like in father and ends with 'ng' in hung
P ong like 'oh' followed by the 'ng' in song
Q i like 'i' in machine
R ia like 'i' in machine followed by 'a' in father
S iao like 'i' in machine followed by the 'ough' in though
T ie like 'i' in machine followed by the 'ay' in day
* Note 3

U iu like 'i' in machine followed by 'oh'
V ian like 'i' in machine followed by 'an' (as described above in L)
W in like 'i' in machine followed by the 'n' in no
X iang like 'i' in machine followed by 'ang' (described above in N)
Y ing like 'ing' in sing
Z iong like 'i' in machine followed by 'ong' (described above in P)
AA u like 'oo' in boo
* Note 4

AB ua like 'oo' in boo followed by the 'a' in father
AC uo like 'oo' in boo followed by 'oh'
AD uai like 'oo' in boo followed by the 'ai' in aisle
AE ui like 'oo' in boo followed by 'ay' in sway
AF uan like 'oo' in boo followed by 'an' (as described above in L)
* Note 5

AG un like 'oo' in boo followed by the 'n' in no
AH uang like 'oo' in boo followed by 'an' (as described above in L)
AI ueng like 'oo' in boo followed by 'an' (as described above in L)
AJ like 'ee' in knee followed by the 'u' in you (but with lips rounded)
sounds like German or French eu
* Note 6

AK e (described above) followed by the 'ay' in day
AL an (described above) followed by 'an' (described above in L)
AM n (described above) followed by the 'n' in no

Note 1: When 'e' is pronounced alone, as one syllable, is not the same sound as used
in 'ye' [ T2 ], which is pronounced like the 'ye' in yes.

Note 2: In the spoken language, there are cases when the 'er' sound [ G1,G2 ] is
appended to other syllables. This is not reflected in the chart. The rules regarding the
use this sound are discussed in the following section on rules for speaking.

Note 3: When 'ie' [ T1 ] is used after an initial, the 'i' is pronounced like the 'i' in
machine followed by 'e' which is pronounced like the 'ay' in day. When 'ie' [ T1 ] is
used alone, it is spelled 'ye' [ T2 ] and pronounced like the 'ye' in yes.

Note 4: Do not be mistaken that the 'u' in the pinyin spellings of yu, ju, qu and xu
represent the 'oo' sound in column AA - it does not. These syllables are located in
column AJ. In this case, the pinyin spelling rules use the letter 'u' as a substitute for
the letter '', but the syllable is spoken with the sound of ''. The pinyin spellings yu,
ju, qu and xu - represent the syllables: , j, q and x .

Note 5: Do not be mistaken that the pinyin spelling of yuan, juan, quan and xuan
represent the 'uan' sound in column AF - they do not. These syllables are located in
the AL column. In this case, the pinyin spelling rules substitute the letter 'u' for '', but
the syllable is spoken with the sound of 'an'. In this case, the spellings yuan, juan,
quan and xuan represent the syllables -. yan, jan, qan and xan .

Note 6: In pinyin spelling, the letter '' is only used in four spellings. (n, l, ne, ye,)
[ AJ9, AJ10, AK9, AK10 ]. The spellings in AJ - AM columns of the chart show that
the letter '' is spelt as 'u' when it is used with the initials 'j', 'q' and 'x'. Even though
they are spelled with 'u', they are not spoken with the same sound as the 'u' in AA.
Syllables in the AJ - AM columns are pronounced using '', not 'u'.

Rules for Speaking
Retroflex r
The retroflex "r" (er) is sometimes attached to a final. This sound is included in the
syllable that it is attached to, so the addition of (er) doesn't change the original
tone. Only an 'r' is added to the pinyin spelling. For instance, (n) becomes
(nr). Standard Mandarin has several instances when this is used. If the retroflex "r"
(er) is added to a word ending in a consonant, the consonant is still pronounced. For
instance, when (er) is added to (din), the final "n" is pronounced. In these
type words, the tongue will be in the position of final consonant and the (er) sound
will have a slight nasal quality.

Tone Change Rules
In spoken Chinese there are times when the tones of some syllables are changed.
However, these changes are not usually reflected in written pinyin. The rules are:

Third Tone Change Rule
If a 3
rd
tone is followed by another 3rd tone, the first 3
rd
tone becomes second tone.
For example, (n ho) - n changes to a 2
nd
tone (n) and (ho) remains a 3
rd

tone. It is written as (n ho) but spoken as (nho).

Tone Change Rules for (b)
The word (b) is 4
th
tone when it is spoken in isolation, but when it is followed by
another 4
th
tone, it is pronounced 2
nd
tone. For example, (b yo) is represented
in pinyin spelling as (b yo), but it is spoken as (b yo). When (b) is used in
affirmative negative questions, as in phrases such as (sh bu sh), it is
pronounce in the neutral tone.

Tone Change Rules for (y)
First tone - The word ' (y)', which means 'one', is pronounced in the 1
st
tone when
it is spoken in isolation, for instance, when counting, using cardinal numbers or
stating non-arithmetic numbers such as room numbers. When it is the last digit of a
number, it will also be spoken in the first tone, for example, (sh y), which
means eleven.

Second tone - When ' (y)' precedes a 4
th
tone syllable, it is pronounced in the 2
nd

tone, for example, (y g ) is pronounced 'y g rn'.

Fourth tone - When ' (y)' precedes a 1
st
, 2
nd
, or 3
rd
tone syllable, it is pronounced
4
th
tone.

Chinese Character
Written Pinyin y zhng y nin y q
Spoken Chinese y zhng y nin y q

Remember: Unlike English, when speaking a multi-syllabic word, the sounds do not
blend. In Chinese, each syllable begins at its proper pitch.

In the Chinese OCW Conversational Chinese Grammar Book and Workbook, the
pinyin has been changed to reflect the tone change rules for (bu) and (yi).

Appendix B - Page 1 of 14
Chinese OCW Conversational Chinese is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution, Noncommercial,
No Derivative Works 2.5 China Mainland License. Based on work at Chinese www.chineseocw.com

Appendix B
Advanced Measure Words

Summary
Section A Using nouns of quantity

Section B Expressing half (bn)

B1. one half of a noun

ling g jzi one orange

bn g jzi half an orange

B2. one and a half of a noun

sn png pji three bottles of beer

sn png bn pji three and a half bottles of beer

B3. one half of a noun of quantity

y nin one year

bn nin one half year

B4. one half of a noun of quantity

y nin one year

y nin bn one and a half years

Section C Expressing Indeterminate Quantities

C1. a few, a little

()
y din(r) nouns

()
y din(r) adjectives

()
yu y din (r) adjectives and verbs

and
y dindin nouns and adjectives
yu y dindin adjectives and verbs
C2. these, those, some

/
n xi / zh xi

y dindin

Section D Using Measure Words with (du)

D1. Numbers that have a units place of 0 and nouns

s sh du kui qin more than 40 rmb

D2. Numbers that have a units place of 1 -9 and nouns

s sh r kui du qin more than 42 rmb

D3. Numbers that have a units place of 0 and nouns of quantity

sh du nin over 10 years

D4. Numbers that have a units place of 1 -9 and nouns of quantity

sh y nin du over 11 years

Section E verbal measure words

Section F characters that are measure words that appear in nouns
Refer to Appendix A for the tone change rules for (y).

Section A Nouns of Quantity
Some nouns are considered nouns of quantity so they are, themselves, considered
measure words. In this case, the numeral is placed just before the noun. The list below
has some commonly used nouns of quantity.

Words that express time:

nin tin zhu fn mio k su
year day week minute second quarter of an hour years old

1.

One year has 12 months.
2.

One day has 24 hours.
3.

One week has seven days.
4.

One hour has 60 minutes.
5.

One minute has 60 seconds.
6.

15 minutes is one quarter of an hour.
7.

He is six years old.

1. y nin yu sh r g yu
2. y tin yu r sh s g xiosh
3. y g xngq yu q tin
4. y g xiosh yu lu sh fn zhng
5. y fn zhng yu lu sh mio
6. sh w fn zhng sh y k zhng
7. t lu su


These words are nouns of quantity and are also measure words. In examples 1 5
they are used as nouns of quantity, in examples 6 9 they are used as measure words.
(A jin is a measurement unique to China, it equals one half of a kilogram.)

jn gng jn k m
half a kilogram kilogram gram meter

1. There are two jin* in one kilogram.
2. There are 1000 grams in one kilogram.
3. He is two meters tall.
4. He is two meters tall.
5.
It is 3 kilometers from my home to
Tiananmen Square.
6. I bought 2 jins of apples.
7.
This dress will take 3 meters of
material. (to make)
8. 100
This bottle has 100 grams of water in
it.
9 2
This big cake takes 2 kilograms of
flour. (to make)

1. y gng jn yu ling jn
2. y gng jn yu y qin k
3. t ling m go
4. t go ling m
5. cng w de ji do tinnmn sh sn qin m
6. w mi le ling jn pnggu
7. zh jin qn z yng le sn m b
8. zh g pngzi l yu 100 k shu
9. zh g d dngo yng le 2 gng jn min fn

Section B Expressing half (bn)

B1. When expressing one half of a noun, the word order is:

(bn) + measure word + noun

Comparison of expressing whole numbers and expressing a half:

w yu ling g jzi I have two oranges.

w yu bn g jzi I have half an orange.

bn png pji half of a bottle of beer
bn zhng zh half of a piece of paper
bn zh j half of a chicken
bn g yu half of a month
bn g xngq half of a week
bn g xiosh half an hour
bn g zhngtu half an hour

B2. When expressing [number] and a half of a noun, the word is:

whole number + measure word (bn) + noun

Comparison of whole numbers and expressing [number] and a half:

w yu sn png pji
I have 3 bottles of beer.
w yu sn png bn pji
I have 3 and one half
bottles of beer.

y bi bn ch one and half cups of tea
ling zhng bn zh
two and a half pieces of
paper
sn g bn jz three and a half oranges
s g bn yu four and a half months
w g bn xngq five and a half weeks
lu g bn xiosh six and a half hours

q g bn zhngtu
seven and half hours

B3. When expressing one half of a noun of quantity, the word order is:

(bn) + noun of quantity

Comparison of whole numbers and expressing a half:

w zh zi Bijng y nin le
I have lived in Beijing
for one year.
w zh zi Bijng bn nin le
I have lived in Beijing
for half a year.

bn nin half of a year
bn tin half of a day
bn fn half of a minute

bn mio half of a second

B4. When expressing [number] and a half of a noun of quantity, the word is:

whole number + noun of quantity (bn)

Comparison of whole numbers and expressing [number] and a half:

w zh zi Bijng y nin le
I have lived in
Beijing for one year.

w zh zi Bijng y nin bn le
I have lived in
Beijing for one and
a half years.

y jn bn yngru one and a half jin of mutton
ling su bn two and a half years old
sn nin bn three and a half years
s m bn four and a half meters
w fn bn five and a half minutes
lu mio bn six and a half seconds

q tin bn
seven and a half days

Section C Expressing Indeterminate Quantities

C1. Expressing a few or a little

a little / a few () ()
y din(r) yu y din (r) y dindin

(with Nouns
When () [ y din (r) ] is used before a noun it has the function of a measure
word to quantify the noun, indicating an indefinite small quantity, usually smaller that
(y xi) indicates (example sentence 6). The noun can be omitted if the noun
being referenced is clear. The retroflex (r) is always optional and (y) may be
omitted except when it appears at the beginning of a sentence.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5. *
6.


1. wmen xin shngling y dinr shrnhu wmen zu ba
2. w b y dinr dngx l zi bngngsh
3. ynwi w h le dinr ju suy w bb kich
4. ch y dinr shnme
5. w q shngdin mi y dinr tng*
6. jiosh yu y xi xushng
*Sugar and candy are the same word in Chinese. People refer to refined white sugar
as (bi tng).

1. First we will talk (about something) and then we will go.
2. I left a few things at the office.
3. Because I drank a little (alcohol), I must not drive.
4. What would you like to eat?
5. I would like to go to the store and buy some candy.
6. There are some students in the classroom.

In the examples below, the nouns are omitted because it is clear from context what the
speaker has in mind.

7. w zh mi ydin
I only bought a little.
8. zi ch dinr ma
Would you like to eat a little
more?

(Adjectives
() [ y din (r) ] does not come before adjectives, but it may be used after
adjectives. It is usually used to form a comparative degree. The retroflex is always
optional and (y) may be omitted except when it appears at the beginning of a
sentence.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

9.
jntin b zutin r ydinr
10.
w po d b t kui ydinr
11.
jn nin de dngtin b q nin de lng ydinr
12.
kui dinr
13.
mn dinr


9. Today is a little warmer than yesterday.
10. I run a little faster than he does.
11. This year winter has been a little colder than last year.
12. Hurry up!
13. Be careful!

In sentence 11, (mn) which literally means slow, is commonly used to mean
be careful.

Adjectives and Verbs
() [ yu y din (r) ] comes before a verb or an adjective, meaning a bit , a
little, or slightly it is often used to qualify something undesirable.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

14. t yu dinr b goxng
15. zh g dy yu dinr chng
16. zh xi yf yu dinr zng le
17. w yu dinr li
18. w yu dinr xing ji

14. He is a little unhappy.
15. This coat is a little long.
16. These clothes are a little dirty.
17. I am a little tired.
18. I miss home a little.

and
(y din din) is a bit lower than () [ yu y din (r) ] but both
expressions follow the same grammatical rules.

19.
20.
21.

19. gi w y din din shjin ju gu le
20. t zh h le y din dinju tu tng le

21. zu zh g ci yo yng y din din xin

19. Give me a little bit of your time and that will be enough.
20. He only has to drink a little (alcohol) and gets a headache.
21. To cook this dish you need a little bit of salt.

(yu y din din) is a bit lower than () [ yu y din (r) ] but both
expressions follow the same grammatical rules.

22.
23.
24.

22. wmen de jiosh hn hoju sh yu y din din r
23. zi zhr zh b cuju sh yu y din din yun
24. ci de wido b cuju sh yu y din din xin

22. Our classroom is good, it is a little hot.
23. Living here isnt bad, but it is a little far (away).
24. This dish isnt bad but it is a little salty.

Example Sentences
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

1.
t yu dinr xing t de bb
2.
zh jin moy yu dinr chngqng hun y g
dun y dinr de
3.
gng li zhnggu de sh huw shnghu
yu y dinr b xgun xin zi xgun le

4.
xin zi zhme mngn ynggi zhy y dinr shnt
5.
n bng ledi ch y dinr yo
6.
t gng ci h le y din jutu yu y dinr tng
7.
dji du kn zhe tt ju d yu dinr b ho y s
8.
w yu y dinr b sh f
9.
w b xing kn n g bsi
w du yndng y dinr xngq y miyu
10.
jntin nunhu y dinr le
11.
t de bng ho y dinr le
12.
w hu shu ydinr fy

1. He looks a little like his father.
2. This sweater is a little long, please exchange it for one that is a little shorter.
3. When I first came to China I wasnt quite used to life (here), now I am a little
more used to it.
4. You are quite busy now, you should give a little (more) attention to your health.
5. You are sick, you need to take a little medicine.
6. He just drank a little alcohol, he has a little bit of a headache.
7. Everyone is looking at him, he feels a little embarrassed.
8. I feel a little sick.
9. I dont want to watch that game, I have no interest in sports.
10. Today is a little warmer. (than expected / than yesterday)
11. He is a little better today. / His health condition is a little better today.
12. I speak a little French.

C1. Expressing these, those, and some
When expressing some, a few or a little , (xi) and (din) are often
used after pronouns (n) and (zh). These are not used with nouns of quantity.
In example 3, (hu) means task and (gn wn) means to finish doing.

1.

These books are Teacher Wangs.
2.

The students in the classroom are Teacher
Wangs students.
3.

Finish these tasks.
4.
I understand everything about the factory.

1. zh xi sh sh Wng losh de
2.
zi jiosh l de n xi xushng
sh Wng losh de xushng

3. b zh dinr hu gn wn
4. gngchng n dinr shw du zhdo

Section D Using Measures Words with (du)
D1. Using measure words and nouns with (du)
(with whole numbers that have a units place of zero)

whole number
(with unit place of 0)
+ + measure word + noun

1. This sweater is more than 40 rmb.
2.
I bought more than 10 jins of mutton
today.
3.
They were on the train for over 10
hours.

1. zh jin moy yo s sh du kui qin
2. jntin w mi le sh du jn yang ru
3. t men zu huch zu le sh du g xio sh

D2. Using measure words and nouns with (du)
(with whole numbers that have a units place of 1 9)

whole number
(with unit place of 1 -9)
+ measure word + + noun

1.

This sweater is more than 42 rmb.
2.

I bought more than 14 jins of
mutton today.
3.

They were on the train for over 15
hours.

1. zh jin mo y yo s sh r kui du qin
2. jntin w mi le sh s jn du yang ru
3. t men zu huch le sh w g du xio sh


D3. Using measure words and nouns of quantity with (du)
(with whole numbers that have a units place of zero)

whole number
(with unit place of 0)
+ +
noun of
quantity

1. He is over 20 years old.
2. I have lived in Beijing for more than 10 years.

1. t r sh du su le
2. w zh zi Bijng sh du nin le

D4. Using measure words and nouns of quantity with (du)
(with whole numbers that have a units place of 1 9)

whole number
(with unit place of 1 -9)
+ noun of quantity +

1. He is over 22 years old.
2. I have lived in Beijing for over 11 years.

1. t r sh r su du le
2. w zh zi Bijng sh y nin du le

Section E Verbal Measure Words
Verbal measure words are most commonly used as compliments of verbs to indicate
the number of times actions happen. The number of times is expressed using a
number and a verbal measure word. The number and measure word go between the
verb and the object. In some instances, it is not necessary to include the object. In the
example below, (tng) means a trip.

I have been to the new bookshop once.

subject verb number of times object
(number + measure word)

w q gu y tng n ji xn de shdin?

subject verb number of times
(number + measure word)

w q gu y tng

When forming questions, (j) and (du sho) are used in place of the
number of times and the measure word is stated. Usually (j) is used for a
relatively small number and (du sho) is used for relatively large numbers.

How many times have you been to the new bookshop?

subject verb number of times? object
( / + measure word)

?
n q gu j tng n ji xn de shdin?

The most common measure word for describing the number of times something
occurs is (c) (one time, occurrence). Especially when answering questions. For
instance, (w q gu y c) (I have been [there] once.) is appropriate for
answering a question, but (tng) would normally be used in a statement.

c one time, occurrence

1. Have you discussed the matter?
2.
How many times have you discussed the
matter?
3. We have discussed it twice.
4. How many times have you met?
5. (We) have met twice.
6.
How many times did you go downtown last
month?
7. (I) went downtown once.
8. Where did you go traveling?
9. This time to the south.

1. n men toln gu zh jin sh
2. n men toln gu j c zh jin sh
3. w men toln gu ling c
4. n men jin le j c min
5. jin le ling c min
6 shng g yu n jn le j c chng
7. jn le y c chng
8. n q nr l xng

9. zh c do nn fng l xng

The verbal measure word (bin) is used to show that an action happens in its
entirety from beginning to end.

1. How many times have you listened (to this)?
2. How many times have you listened (to this)?
3. I have already listened (to this) several times.
4. I plan to review (something) again.
5. I have already written (something) twice.
6. I changed it three times.
7.

Say that again.
8.

Read this article again.

1. n tng gu j bin le
2. n tnggu du sho bin le
3. w yjng tng gu j bin le
4. w dsun zi fx y bin
5. w yjng xi le ling bin
6. w yu zhngxn gi le sn bin
7. zi shu y bin
8. zh pin wnzhng n zi kn y bin ba

Section E Characters that are measure words that appear in nouns
Some characters that are measure words appear in nouns. For instance, to say a cup
of (something), (bi) is used. (y bi ch) means a cup of tea. To say
a cup as in the sentence I have a cup, one would say (w yu
y g bizi.).

png bottle
sn png shu three bottles of water
sn g png zi three bottles

Note: Many characters are both nouns and measure words. In these examples, (ji)
means home or family:
1. There are four people in my family.
w ji yu sn g rn
2. I will go home tomorrow.
w mngtin hu ji


In these examples, (ji) is a measure word for some business establishments.

y ji shngdin one store

ling ji ynhng two banks

sn ji yyun three hospitals

s ji lgun four hotels

Appendix C - Page 1 of 5

Appendix C
Shopping / Money / Colors / Clothing

New Words
1.

rn mn b RMB (Chinese unit of currency)
2.

yun Chinese unit of currency
3.

jio
.1 RMB (rn mn b)
4.

mo (spoken only)
.1 RMB (rn mn b)
5.

fn
.01 RMB (rn mn b)
6.

kui (spoken only) Chinese unit of currency
7.

qin money
8.

jn
Chinese unit of weight
( .5 kilograms )
9.

y gng all together
10.

bn measure word for books
11.

zh measure word for garments
12.

jin measure word for writing instruments
13.

bn z notebook
14.

gng b fountain pen
15.

j z orange
16.

png gu apple
17.

hu shng m peanut
18.

d t map
19.

chn shn shirt
20.

bi one hundred (100)
21.

bi white
22.

hung yellow

Currency
The Chinese unit of currencythe (rn mn b), is written as (yun). It is
usually spoken as (kui). Amounts of money are expressed in the following
examples. Adding (qin) to the amount is optional.
(Refer to Appendix A for the tone change rules for (y).)

When expressing amounts of money, (r) is only used for an amount ending in
two (fn) otherwise (ling) is used.

Written Spoken
1.00

1.05

1.25

1.50

1.50

1.65

0.02
/ /

1.00
y yun (qin) written

y kui (qin) spoken
1.05
y yun lng w fn (qin) written

y kui lng w fn (qin) spoken
1.25
y yun ling jio w (fn) written

y yun ling jio w (fn qin) spoken
1.50
y yun w written

y kui w spoken

y yun w (mo qin) written
1.65
y yun lu jio w (fn qin) written

y kui lu mo w (fn qin) spoken
0.02
ling fn / r fn written and spoken

Questions
When asking the price of an item or number of items, first state the quantity (using
measure words or units of quantity) - then state the item - then add (du sho
qin).

amount / quantity item
?

1.
How much is a jin of apples?
2.
How much is one notebook?
3.
How much is a bag of peanuts?
4.
How much is the fountain pen?

1. y jn pnggu dusho qin?
2. y bn bnz dusho qin
3. y bo hushngm dusho qin
4. y zh gngb dusho qin


To express the desire to buy something, , or may be used.

5. ( / / )
I want one bag of peanuts.
6. ( / / )
What would you like?
7.
( / / )
How [many / much] would you
like?

5. w (yo / mi / yomi) y bo hushngm.
6. nn (yo / mi / yomi) shnme
7. nn (yo / mi / yomi) dusho

Example Sentences
1.

I would like (to buy) a map of China.
2.

How much is a map of China?

1. w yo zhnggu dt.
2.
zh zhng zhnggu dt dusho qin

1.

What would you like to buy (see)?
2.

I would like to buy two notebooks.
3.

How much is one notebook?
4.
One notebook is five mo.
5.

How much all together?
6.
Together, one kui.

1. nn mi shnme
2. w mi ling g bnzi.
3. y g bnzi dusho qin
4. y g bnzi w mo.
5. y gng dusho qin
6. y gng y kui.

1.

I would like to buy these two shirts.
2.

How much are the shirts?
3.
() Yellow shirts are 50 .10
4.
() White shirts are 48 . 80
5.
() Together, 92 . 90
6.
You gave me 100 . 00

7.
() Here is your change 7 . 10

1. w yo mi zh ling jin chnshn.
2.
y jin chnshn dusho qin
3. hung chnshn wsh kui y (mo).
4. bi chnshn sshr kui b (mo).
5. y gng jushr kui ju (mo).
6. nn gi w ybikui.
7. zho nn qkuiy (mo).

1.

How much is one jin of oranges?
2.

One jin is 1.30.
3.

How much is one jin of apples?
4.

One jin is 3.00.
5.
I would like to buy three jin of oranges, one

jin apples.
6.

Together 6.90.
7.

You gave me 10.00.
8.

Your change is 3.10.

1.
y jn jz dusho qin
2. y jn ykui sn.
3.
y jn pnggu dusho qin
4. y jn sn kui.
5.
w mi sn jn jzy jn pnggu.
6. y gng lu kui ju.
7. nn gi w sh kui qin.
8. zho nn sn kui y.

Colors Clothes

hi black
y (shung) p xi a pair of leather shoes

hng red
y (shung) shuto a pair of gloves

l green
y (shung) wzi a pair of socks

ln blue
y (tio) kzi a pair of pants

hu gray
y (tio) dunk a pair of shorts

z purple

y (jin) dy a coat

j orange
y (jin) yy a raincoat

zng brown

y (dng) mozi a hat

qin light
y (jin) qnzi a skirt, a dress

shn dark
y (jin) niy an article of underwear

Measure words, included in parenthesis in the pinyin column, may not be left out.

Colors go after the measure words and may be stated in the 4 ways shown below.
Color may be modified by putting "dark (shn)" or " (qin) light" before them
as in example 2 below.

1) The color may be stated in a single syllable:

a yellow shirt y jin hung chnshn

2) (de) may be used after the color:

a dark yellow shirt y jin shn hungde chnshn

3) (s) may be used after the color:

a yellow shirt y jin hungs chnshn

4) (s de) may be used after the color:

a yellow shirt y jin qin hungsde chnshn

Appendix D - Page 1 of 2

Appendix D
Numbers in Use
New Words
1.

zu sit, be in a bus or car
2.

l ch bus number
3.

ho m number
4.

din hu telephone
5.

din hu ho m telephone number
6.

fngjin house, apartment, room
7.

fng jin ho house / apartment / room number
8.

k class
9.

ji measure word for classes
11.

zhng heavy
12.

jn unit of weight ( .5 kilograms )
13.

gng jn kilogram
14.

m meter
16.

su years old
17.

kui fast, quick
18.

go tall, high

Telephone and Bus Numbers
ONE
When speaking, telephone numbers and bus numbers; the number one is pronounced
yo . This avoids confusion with the number 7.

A: What bus do you take? n zu j l ch
B: 713 I take bus 713. w zu q yo sn

A:

What is your telephone number?
B:
5123 7190
My number is 5123 7190.

A:
n de dinhu hom sh dusho

B:
w de dinhu hom sh w yo r sn q yo ju lng

Appendix D - Page 2 of 2

Measurements (height and weight)
A: How much do you weigh? n du zhng
B: 180 I weigh 180 . w y bi b sh jn

A: What is your height? n du go
B: I am 1.52 meters (tall). w y m w r

A:
? How many jin(s) are in one kilogram?
B:
One kilogram is two jin(s).

A:
y gngjn sh j jn

B:
y gngjn sh ling jn

Age
When express age or time (kui) is used to express 'almost'.

A:
How old is he? t j su
(children under 10)
B:
He is almost 9 years old. t kui ju su le.

A: n du d How old are you?
B: w r sh lu su. I am 26 years old.
w kui sh q su le. I am almost 27 years old.

Ordinal numbers
To create an ordinal number, place before the number.
, 1st, 2nd ,3rd

Tomorrow, the first class is Chinese.

mngtin dy ji k sh hny.

Room numbers

A:

What is your room number?
B:
508
My room number is 508.

A:
n fngjin ho sh dusho

B: w de fngjin sh w lng b ho.

Appendix E - Page 1 of 3

Appendix E
Numbers from .001 to one million
Percentages / Fractions

New Words
1.

qin
one thousand (1,000)
2.

wn
ten thousand (10,000)
3.

y bi wn
one million (1,000,000)
4.

din
decimal point
5.
(number)
bi fn zh (number)

(number) percent (%)
7.

tng xu
classmate
8.

bn
class
10.

n shng
female student
11.

nn shng
male student

Fractions and Percentages
AB
A is the whole amount, B is the part
fn zh

100% 20% 2/5

bi fn zh bi bi fn zh r sh w fn zh r

1.
Our class is 20% boys.
2.
1/4 of my classmates are girls.

1. wmen bn bi fnzh rsh sh nnshng.

2. s fnzh y de tngxu sh nshng.

The number 10,000 is one unit.

y wn 1,000

ling wn 20,000

r sh wn 200,000

y bi wn 1,000,000

When speaking numbers, as you begin on the left proceed to the right, each digit
represents the place value of the digit immediately following the one just stated and
trailing zeros may be omitted.

number is expressed as

110

y bi y
110

y bi y sh
120

y bi r
120

y bi r sh
199

y bi ju sh ju
1,000

y qin
1,200

y qin r
1,200

y qin r bi
2,999

ling qin ju sh ju

When stating large numbers, saying (zero) takes the place of several zeros.

number is expressed as

1,001
y qin lng y
1,010
y qin lng y sh
10,002
y wn lng r
10,020
y wn lng r sh
100,003
sh wn lng sn

To express "a few", (j) is used with (sh), (bi) and (qin).

j sh
a few 10's

j bi
a few hundred

j qin
a few thousand


The number TWO

In the thousands place and above, 2 should be read as (ling). 2000 is
(ling qin). When 2 appears in the hundreds place it may be read as either (r) or
(ling).

200

r bi OR

ling bi

2,000

ling qin
2,002

ling qin lng r
2,020

ling qin lng r sh
2,200

ling qin ling bi
2,200

ling qin r bi
2,202

ling qin ling bi lng r
2,202

ling qin r bi lng r
2,220

ling qin ling bi r sh
2,220

ling qin r bi r sh
2,299

ling qin ling bi ji sh ji
2,299

ling qin r bi ji sh ji

Decimal numbers

0.001

lng din lng lng y
0.01

lng din lng
0.1

lng din y
2.1

r din y
2.01

r din lng y
2.001

r din lng lng y
2.201

r din r lng y

Page 1 of 4

is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-No Derivative Works 2.5 China Mainland License. Based on work at Chinese
www.chineseocw.com
A B C D E F G H I J K L
1 a o e (i) (i) er ai ei ao ou an
2 a o e er ai ei ao ou an
3 b ba bo bai bei bao ban
4 p pa po pai pei pao pou pan
5 m ma mo me mai mei mao mou man
6 f fa fo fei fou fan
7 d da de dai dei dao dou dan
8 t ta te tai tao tou tan
9 n na ne nai nei nao nou nan
10 l la le lai lei lao lou lan
11 z za ze zi zai zei zao zou zan
12 c ca ce ci cai cao cou can
13 s sa se si sai sao sou san
14 zh zha zhe zhi zhai zhei zhao zhou zhan
15 ch cha che chi chai chao chou chan
16 sh sha she shi shai shei shao shou shan
17 r ra re ri rao rou ran
18 j
19 q
20 x
21 g ga ge gai gei gao gou gan
22 k ka ke kai kei kao kou kan
23 h ha he hai hei hao hou han

Page 2 of 4

www.chineseocw.com
A M N O P Q R S T U V W
1 en ang eng ong i ia iao ie iu ian in
2 en ang eng yi ya yao ye you yan yin
3 b ben bang beng bi biao bie bian bin
4 p pen pang peng pi piao pie pian pin
5 m men mang meng mi miao mie miu mian min
6 f en ng ng f fa fe
7 d den dang deng dong di diao die diu dian
8 t tang teng tong ti tiao tie tian
9 n nen nang neng nong ni niao nie niu nian nin
10 l lang leng long li lia liao lie liu lian lin
11 z en ng ng ng z za ze zo
12 c en ng ng ng c ca ce co
13 s en ng ng ng s sa se so
14 zh zhen zhang zheng zhong
15 ch chen chang cheng chong
16 sh shen shang sheng
17 r en ng ng ng r ra re ro
18 j ji jia jiao jie jiu jian jin
19 q qi qia qiao qie qiu qian qin
20 x xi xia xiao xie xiu xian xin
21 g en ng ng ng g ga ge go
22 k en ng ng ng k ka ke ko
23 h en ng ng ng h ha he ho

Page 3 of 4

www.chineseocw.com
A X Y Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH
1 iang ing iong u ua uo uai ui uan un uang
2 yang ying yong wu wa wo wai wei wan wen wang
3 b bing bu
4 p ping pu
5 m ming mu
6 f fu
7 d ding du duo dui duan dun
8 t ting tu tuo tui tuan tun
9 n niang ning nu nuo nuan
10 l liang ling lu fuo fuan lun
11 z zu zuo zui zuan zun
12 c cu cuo cui cuan cun
13 s su suo sui suan sun
14 zh zhu zhua zhuo zhuai zhui zhuan zhun shuang
15 ch chu chua chuo chuai chui chaun chun chuang
16 sh shu shua shuo shuai shui shuan shun shuang
17 r ru rua ruo rui ruan run
18 j jiang jing jiong
19 q qiang qing qiong
20 x xiang xing xiong
21 g gu gua guo guai gui guan gun guang
22 k ku kua kuo kuai kui kuan kun kuang
23 h hu hua huo huai hui huan hun huang

Page 4 of 4
Chinese OCW Conversational Chinese is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-No Derivative Works 2.5 China Mainland License. Based on work at Chinese
www.chineseocw.com

A AI AJ AK AL AM
1 ueng e an n
2 weng yu yue yuan yun
3 b
4 p
5 m
6 f
7 d
8 t
9 n n ne
10 l l le
11 z
12 c
13 s
14 zh
15 ch
16 sh
17 r
18 j ju jue juan jun
19 q qu que quan qun
20 x xu xue xuan xun
21 g
22 k
23 h

Glossary - Page 1 of 25

Glossary
Unit 30S are words in Unit 30 listed as Supplementary words

Chinese Pinyin English Meaning Unit
A
i love 19
i short 5
i rn husband or wife 11
n jng quiet 28
n qun di seat belt 33
B
ba softens a request 31
b measure word for chair 15
b a preposition used to make a subject
object verb sentence
33
b eight 4
b ba father 3
bi white 24
bi to place things for the purpose decorating 17
bn half 9
bn move (things) 30S
bn gng sh office 19
bn ji to move (to a new home) 33
bo to carry (in ones arms) 17
bo to wrap (a gift, a box) 33
bo go report 24
bo gu parcel, package 33
bo zh newspaper 4
bi introduces the doer of an action in a passive
sentence
34
bi to carry on ones back 17
bi bin north side 15
bi min north side 15
bi zi cup 6

Bijng the capital of China 10
bn measure word for books 4
bn zi notebook 33
b (something) compared to (something) 6
b j bn notebook 33
b j bn din no laptop computer 33
b jio relatively, comparatively 6
b si match, competition 27
b x must 24
b y granduate 12
bin change to, transform 33
bin side 15
bio form, table, chart 33
bi other, do not 26
bi de other(s) 26
bn gun hotel 29
bng sick 19
bng rn sick person, patient 33
b l glass, window pane 33
b zi neck 34
b no 1
b measure word for movies 22
b r not as (comparison standard) as 6
C
c wipe 11
ci then 26
ci food 25
cn gun restaurant 15
co grass 17
co d the ground covered with grass growing on it 17
ch tea 22
ch short of 9
ch to plug in 33
ch tu electric plug 33

ch y tea leaves 34
chng long, length 6
chng sing 25
chng chng often 18
chng chng the Great Wall 26
chng g to sing 11
cho sh supermarket, grocery store 29
ch vehicle (car, bike, bus) 16
ch png covered parking for bicycles 33
chn shn shirt 24
chng turn into 33
chng sh city 6
ch to eat 12
chng to dash against with great force 34
chu t drawer 33
chu yn smoke (cigarettes, etc.) 24
ch chi travel on business 13
ch f set out 32
ch z ch taxi 22
ch z q ch taxi 16
chun to wear, to put on (clothing) 17
chung bed 17
chung ti window sill 17
chu blow 34
c (number of) times 18
c din dictionary 4
cng from (a place) 12
cng from (a place or time) 29
cng b never 18
cu incorrect 22
D
d big 5
d hit, send 22
d play (badminton, basketball, ping pong) 29

d din hu a phone call 11
d ln qi play basketball 11
d din hu make a telephone call 22
d ji everybody, everyone 22
d ki open, turn on 33
d mn main gate 16
d qi to play (a ball game) 25
d ro disturb 26
d sun to plan 33
d xio size 6
d xu university 12
d y coat 5
d yn to print (computer) 25
di to take, to lead 17
di to wear (hat, glasses, tie) 17
di to take, bring, carry 30
dn sh but 26
dng to become 31
do to arrive, to attain a goal 22
do measure word for math problems 25
de particle to indicate possession 3
de structural particle 20
de du a lot 6
d gu Germany 5
de sh hou when something happens 11
di to have to, must, to need to 24
dng wait 11
dng light 34
d ground 16
d pass or hand something to someone 33
d low 6
d di younger brother 3
d fang a place or location 10
d q area 28

d shang on the floor, on the ground 22
d ti subway 19
d t map 6
din ch battery 33
din hu telephone 22
din no computer 3
din sh television 10
din xn a snack 30S
din yng movie 11
din zhng o'clock 9
din z electronic 33
din z yu jin email 33
dio fall, drop 30S
dng sting (by a mesquito or bee) 34
dng to move 34
dng understand 20
dng bin east side 15
dng fng eastern, Asia 26
dng min east side 15
dng tin winter 6
dng xi things 11
du all, both 2
d read, study 25
d degree (temperature) 6
d ji vacation 18
d sh to study 26
dun lin to do physical exercise 18
du correct 2
du min opposite 15
du chng how long? (time) 9
du le a lot 6
du shao how many? how much? 7
E
lu s Russia 15

r two 4
F
f send, transmit 33
f pio receipt 24
f sho to have a fever 13
f wn French (language) 7
fn meal 13
fn gun restaurant 28
fn y to translate 25
fng to put something somewhere 17
fng square 5
fng ji vacation 29
fng jin room 6
fng zi house,apartment,building,room 6
fi fly 30S
fi chng very, extremely 5
fi j airplane 16
fn zhng minute 9
fng measure word for letters 22
fng wind 33
fng zheng kite 30S
f measure word for paintings 22
f jn nearby 29
f m parents 26
f qn father 30S
f x review (a lesson) 33
G
gi change to, transform 33
gi should 24
gn to do 10
gn jng clean 20
gng just (now) 30S
go tall 5
go s tell 26

go xng happy, pleased 5
g general purpose measure word 4
g song 25
g ge older brother 3
gi to give 11
gn with, and 29
gng gng q ch public bus 16
gng l kilometer 29
gng yun park 18
gng zu a job, to work 11
gu dog 22
g gng Forbidden City (historical site in Beijing) 26
g k customer 33
g niang young lady 34
gu to hang something up 17
gu blow 33
gun close 17
gun dio turn off (electric things) 33
gun shang close, turn off 33
gung used up, nothing left 34
Gung zhu a city in China 29
gu expensive, honorable, to be named (family
name)
1
Guln a province of China 12
gu particle for indicating past experience 12
gu come or go across, to cross 30
H
H r bn a city in northeastern China 6
hi still, yet, still more, also, (used for
emphasis)
26
hi sea 30S
hi p afraid 19
hi shi or (in a question - not used in a statement) 2
hi zi child 6
Hng zhu a city in southeastern China 6

ho number (expressing a day) 8
ho successful, satisfactory, good 22
ho good 1
ho ch delicious 28
ho m number 33
h and 2
h drink 10
h shng close a book 33
h zi box (small) 33
hi dark, black 25
hi bn blackboard 11
hn very 5
hn hate 19
hn du many 7
hn sho not much, not many, not often 18
hng red 5
hu bin behind 15
hu min behind 15
h zho passport 33
hu to paint or draw (a picture) 22
hu flower 1
hu use time, spend time 31
hu png flower vase 33
hu yun bn gun Garden Hotel 29
hui broken 25
hun return (something) 22
hun to exchange 25
hun jng environment 28
hur painting, picture 22
hur flower 30
hu return 19
hu will 11
hu can, will, probably 25
hu li come back 13

hu d to answer 22
hu y sh meeting room 29
hu ch train 16
hu zh or (in a statement - not used in a question) 2
J
j extremely 28
j to take note, remember, record 33
j put on or wear belts, scarves and tied
things
33
j mail (verb) 30S
j several, how many? 7
j chng airport 29
j din what time? 9
j pio plane ticket 33
j sh in a timely manner 32
j t guitar 28
ji home (a place), family (people) 11
ji measure word for shops and stores 12
ji k jacket 33
ji qin price 6
jin measure word for articles of clothing 5
jin to meet, to see 22
jin measure word for affairs and matters 25
jin zh building (noun) 15
jing speak, say, tell 25
jio to be called 1
jio to hand over or hand in something 22
jio sh classroom 3
jio xu lu teaching building 29
jio zi Chinese dumpling 10
ji borrow 12
ji to receive, to pick up (i.e., a child from
school)
33
ji street 22
ji din hu to answer the phone 33

ji gu outcome, result 28
ji hn married 26
ji jie older sister 3
ji ju solve, resolve, settle 32
ji ki take off (a belt) 33
ji mi sister 3
jn tightly 32
jn near 29
jn enter 30
jn nin this year 8
jn tin today 6
jng ch police 33
jng chng often 18
jng l manager 32
jng yn experienced 6
ji old (things not people or animals) 5
ji then 12
ji nine 4
ji alcohol, alcoholic drinks 24
j zi sentence 17
ju de to think, to feel 24
K
k fi coffee 10
k fi gun coffee shop 30S
ki open, turn on 17
ki drive, open, begin 19
ki hu start a meeting, have a meeting 11
ki ch drive a car (bus, truck) 19
ki fng to make open to the public 26
ki sh begin, start 29
ki shu boiling water 34
kn to see, to watch 10
kn bng see a doctor 19
kng to carry something on ones shoulders 33

k a quarter of an hour 9
k measure word for trees 6
k bn textbook 25
k jin break between classes 31
k tng living room 32
k y allow, permit, may 25
k zhu school desk for students 15
kng tio air conditioner 33
k cry 32
kui fast, quick 9
kui a piece of 34
kun wide 6
L
l spicey hot 25
l pull 33
l lin zipper 33
li come 10
ln lazy 5
ln qi basketball 25
lo old (people and animals - not objects) 1
lo lao maternal grandmother 17
lo sh teacher 1
le particle for indicating completed action 12
lng cold 6
l from (a place) 29
L plum, a common surname 1
l inside 11
l w gift 33
l bi week 8
l bian in, inside 16
l ki leave 26
l mian in, inside 16
l w gift 30S
li equivalent to (ling g) 4

lin face 33
ling measure word for vehicles and bicycles 4
ling two (used with measure words) 4
lio chit chat 31
lio verb compliment indicating possibility 25
lio tin chit chat 31
lio tinr chit chat 11
Ll a name of a person 33
ln j neighbor 32
lng zero 4
lng di necktie 33
lng wi other, besides 26
li six 4
li l fluent 28
lu building 5
lu fng multi-story building 16
l road 16
l yn j cassette tape recorder 34
l yu to travel for pleasure 18
M
ma modal particle used at the end of a sentence
to change a statement into a question
1
m fan trouble, inconvenience 33
m ma mother 3
m shng immediately 30S
mi sell 13
mi buy 11
mi wn sell out of something 13
mi dng xi go shopping 11
mn slow 20
mn y satisfy 32
mng busy 5
mo cat 30S
mo b brush for calligraphy 19
mo y sweater 12

mi every 10
mi gu the USA 2
mi gu rn American citizen 2
mi mei younger sister 3
mi yu do not have 7
mi yun American dollars 33
men a suffix added to pronouns indicating plural 2
mn door, gate 17
mn ku door, gate 17
min side, surface 15
min bo bread 33
min tio noodles 19
Mng bright, a given name 1
mng measure word for persons 33
mng nin next year 8
mng tin tomorrow 8
mng xn pin postcard 33
mng zi name 1
m sh sh magician 33
m qn mother 30S
N
n to carry in ones hand, to fetch 25
n that 3
n which 2
n me that much 6
n xi those 5
nn bin south side 15
nn gu sad, grieved 28
nn kn ugly 5
nn min south side 15
nn png you boyfriend 3
no zhng alarm clock 33
nr where? 10
ne modal particle used at the end of a sentence
to create a question in a soft tone
2

ne a particle that indicates an action in
progress
11
nng can, will 25
n you 1
n men you (plural) 2
nin year 8
nin to read aloud 17
nn you (formal, indicating respect) 1
ni cow 33
ni yu New York 6
nng make 33
n png you girlfriend 3
n sh Madam, lady, respectful way to address a
woman that is older than yourself
1
P
p climb 30
p to lie face down 32
p to dislike, to fear 19
pi du to wait in line 31
pi zi sign 17
png bin beside 15
po b run 18
png touch, bump 33
png you friend 3
p ji beer 30
p png critisize 34
pin measure word for literary articles 22
pin yi inexpensive 6
pio ticket 13
pio liang pretty 5
png bottle (of something) 30
png gu apple 6
png png qi ping pong, table tennis 25
png zi bottle (noun) 30


Q
q ride (a bike, a horse, motorcycle) 19
q rise 30
q seven 4
q ch to ride a bike 25
q ch car 19
q chung get up 31
q m to ride a horse 25
q pin cheat, swindle 34
q z xng ch ride a bike 19
qin money 22
qin b pencil 4
qin bin front side 15
qin min front side 15
qing wall 17
qi cut, clice 22
qn kui diligent, hardworking 5
qng please 1
qng chu clear 20
qi ball 33
q go 10
q to take, to fetch 33
q nin last year 8
qn zi dress, skirt 17
R
rn hu then, afterwards 26
r hot 6
r qng cordially 32
rn person 2
rn ku population 6
rn mn b Chinese currency 33
rn shi to meet someone, to know someone 24
rn wi opinion 24
rn zhn conscientious 32

rng to throw 33
rng dio throw away 33
r day 8
r bn Japan 5
ru meat 34
r gu if 26
S
sn three 4
so sweep 33
sh f sofa 22
shn mountain 30
shng to injure 34
shng bn to start work, to be at work 23
shng bian top side 16
shng ch to get into a vehicle 23
shng chun to get in a boat 23
shng din store, shop 10
shng ge xng q last week 8
shng ge yu last month 8
Shng hi Shanghai (a major city in China) 10
shng ji to set out on a (local) trip (ie., to go
shopping)
23
shng k to start class, to be in class 23
shng lu to go upstairs 23
shng l to set out on (long) jouney 23
shng mian top side 16
shng w morning 9
shng xu to go to school (daily classes or begin a
major course)
23
sh j t blueprints 33
shn me what 1
shn me sh hu when? 10
shn t health, body 11
shng bng fall ill, become sick 25
shng c new words 33

shng hu life 26
shng r birthday 8
shng yn voice, sound 6
shng zi rope 33
sh ten 4
sh is, are, am 1
sh matters or affairs 25
sh jin time 9
sh pn foodstuffs 19
shr affairs, matters 31
shu to receive 25
shu hand 32
shu receive 22
shu j cell phone 33
shu d capital 29
shu shi to put in order, to tidy up 33
sh tree 6
sh measure word meaning a bunch (of
flowers)
30
sh book 3
sh bo book bag, backpack 16
sh din bookstore 14
sh fu comfortable 32
sh ji bookshelf 16
sh xu math (as a subject) 25
sh y leaf 34
shu sleep 20
shu water 33
shu (shi) who (commonly pronounced shi) 2
shu gu fruit 5
shu jio sleep 11
shu png level 25
s four 4
s die 26

s j driver 25
sng deliver, give (free of charge) 22
s sh dormitory 12
su to lock 34
su y so 26
T
t he 2
t she 2
tn play a stringed musical instrument with
ones fingers, pluck a string
28
t men they (for a group of both females and
males)
2
t men they (females) 2
ti too 5
ti dng table lamp 17
ti yng sun 30S
tn talk, discuss 26
tng to burn, to scald 34
tng to lie down or recline 17
to ln discuss 11
to yn hate, disgusting 19
tng to have pain 25
t kick 34
tin day 8
tin qi weather 6
Tinjn a city near Beijing 31
tio measure word for roads 6
tio measure word for skirts and dresses 24
tio w to dance 18
ti to stick something to another thing 17
ti l railway, railroad tracks 34
tng stop 30S
tng listen, hear 20
tng chng regular, ordinary, normal 18
tong sh colleague, coworker 33

tng xu classmate 3
tng zh notice 33
tu head 32
t sh gun library 10
tu leg 25
tu push 22
tu take off (clothing and shoes) 33
W
wi bian outside 16
wi gu foreign country 28
wi mian outside 16
wi y coat 17
wn to complete, to finish 22
wn late 31
wn fn dinner 22
wn hu party (in the evening) 33
wn shang evening, late, night time 9
Wng king, a common surname 1
wnr play, relax and enjoy oneself 19
Wi great, a common given name 1
wi shn me why 19
wi xin dangerous 25
wn ask 1
wn hu culture 26
wn jin documents, papers 25
wn t question, problem 25
wn zhng article, passage, essay 19
wn zi mosquito 34
w to hold 32
w I, me 1
w men we 2
w sh bedroom 33
w five 4
w fn lunch 31

w zi room 22
X
x wash 11
x bin west side 15
x gu watermelon 22
x huan like 19
x min west side 15
xi k to end a class 12
xi bn to get off work 23
xi bian under, below, bottom side 16
xi ch to get out of a vehicle 23
xi chun to get out of a boat 23
xi ge xng q next week 8
xi ge yu next month 8
xi k to end a class 23
xi lu to go downstairs 23
xi mian under, below, bottom side 16
xi tin summer 6
xi w afternoon 9
xi xu to end a day of school 23
xi xu to snow 23
xi y to rain 13
xin first 26
xin sheng mister, gentleman 1
xin zi now 10
xing think, want, miss (long for) 24
xing jio banana 6
xing zi box (large), suitcase 33
xio smile, laugh 32
xio little, small 1
xio gu puppy 22
xio hu joke 25
xio ji young lady, Miss (title) 1
xio sh hour 9

xio tu thief 33
xio zhng headmaster, school principle 3
xi shoe 33
xi write 11
xi xie thanks, thank you 19
xi xn to write a letter 19
xi z write, write letters or characters 20
xn letter 19
xn new 5
xn xin fresh 5
xng OK 31
xng surname 1
xng f. happiness 6
xng li luggage 33
xng q week 8
xing d brother 3
xi repair 28
xi l to repair 25
xi xi rest, break, a day off 11
xu q term, semester 8
xu sheng student 2
xu x study 10
xu xio school 3
xu yun campus 15
Y
yn jng glasses 17
yn yun performer, actor 32
yo medicine 18
yo want, will, intend 24
yo bite 34
yo shi if 26
y page 16
y night 23
y also 2

yye paternal grandfather 17
y one 4
y dinr a little bit 6
y dng already 22
y fu clothes 19
y hu after 12
y hu after 27
y hur indicates a short time 31
y jng already 25
y q together 11
y qin before 12
y qin before 27
y xi indicates a short time or casual manner 31
y xir indicates a short time or casual manner 31
y xi some 6
y yng the same 6
y yun hospital 15
y zi chair 15
ybin...ybin while (two actions occurring at the same
time)
27
yn hng bank 30
yn wi because 11
yn yu music 6
yng gi should 24
yng gu England 2
yng gu rn British citizen 2
yng wn English language 5
yng y English language 10
yng use 19
yu (1) indicates a repetition of an action
(2) indicates a succession of actions
28
yu have 7
yu bin right side 15
yu r yun kindergarten 33

yu j post office 15
yu min right side 15
yu pio stamp 33
yu y shng din Friendship Store 12
yu yng swim 24
yu.yu indicates two actions that happen
in the same time period
28
y f grammar 33
y mo qi badminton 29
y sn umbrella 33
y x preview (a lesson) 33
y yn language 29
y y raincoat 33
yun round 5
yun far 29
yun zh b ballpoint pen 4
yun zi yard, courtyard 34
yu month 8
yu li yu used to state a progression 6
yn dng sports, participating in sports 18
Z
zi an adverb that indicates an action in
progress
11
zi in, at 14
zi at, there exists, there is 15
zi to be at a place 22
zi (1) indicates a repetition of an action
(2) Indicates a continuation
28
zi jin good bye 1
zn men we 2
zo early 21
zo fn breakfast 12
zo shang morning 9
zn me how? 19
zn me yng how? (when asking about the condition of 24

something or someone)
zhi to take off things [that use ] 33
zhi pick (flowers, fruit, etc.) 34
zhn to stand 17
Zhng a common surname 1
zhng measure word for newspapers and pieces of
paper
4
zhng measure word for table 15
zho to look for 11
zho j worry, hurry 24
zho xing j camera 17
zhe aspect particle indicating a continuing state
or action
17
zhe adverbial modifier to show the manner in
which an action is done
32
zh this 3
zh ge xng q this week 8
zh ge yu this month 8
zh me this much 6
zh me so, very 26
zh xi these 5
zhng zi an adverb that indicates an action in
progress
11
zhr here 11
zh only 26
zh measure word for pens and pencils 4
zh do to know 26
zh hu after 27
zh qin before 27
zhng gu China 2
zhng gu rn Chinese citizen 2
zhng jin middle, between 15
zhng wn Chinese (language) 7
zhng w noon 9
zhu week 8

zhu m weekend 18
zh live 12
zh y pay attention to 24
zhu to grab, to sieze, to catch 33
zhu zh to catch, to sieze 34
zhun y university major 6
zhung to bump, to hit 34
zhung load, pack 33
zhung xi decorate, remodel 33
zhn bi prepare 33
zhu zi table 5
z xng ch bicycle 4
zu walk, to leave a place 12
zu l to walk down the street 32
zu most 19
zu ho best 26
zu jn recently 11
zu x huan favorite 19
zu measure word for buildings 5
zu to do 10
zu to sit 17
zu to ride in a vehicle 19
zu tin yesterday 6
zu bin left side 15
zu min left side 15
zu y homework 22
zu y bn homework notebook 33

Conversational Chinese Grammar Text

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Conversational Chinese Grammar Text

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Page 1 of 265

Chinese OCW Conversational Chinese is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-No

We have the same number of children

I did not borrow a

We wrote down what

The cars may not drive

They went into the

They came out of the

Dad brought many gifts

I will (read/watch) for one hour.

How long has it been since you came to

I came to Beijing over two months ago.

I understand everything about the factory.

I would like to buy three jin of oranges, one

y (shung) p xi a pair of leather shoes

y (shung) shuto a pair of gloves

y (shung) wzi a pair of socks

y (tio) kzi a pair of pants

y (tio) dunk a pair of shorts

y (jin) qnzi a skirt, a dress

y (jin) niy an article of underwear

You might also like